JP7284030B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing games.

In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, there has been proposed a technique for displaying character information of characters' lines in different modes during execution of a super ready-to-win effect (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-77592 A

According to the technique described in Patent Document 1, when displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, the control load for displaying the moving image increases, or recognition of the character image becomes difficult. Inconvenience may occur in display control.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enables appropriate display control.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
the data in the second storage area includes data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements including a first constituent element and a second constituent element and outline data usable for displaying the character image ;
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image ,
The effect executing means executes, as the specific effect, a first specific effect corresponding to the case of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a second specific effect corresponding to the case not being controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The moving image control means is capable of controlling display of moving images using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
a character image data table composed of data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area;
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
The degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled when the character image is displayed using the second character image data table, rather than when the character image is displayed using the first character image data table. is high,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying the first character image using a first component made up of first character information and a second component made up of first display setting information; and second data for displaying the second character image using a first component configured by the second character information and a second component configured by the second display setting information,
The second character image data table displays the third character image using the first data, the first element composed of the third character information, and the second element composed of the third display setting information. and a third data to
A specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group can be displayed, and a second component related to the specific character image can be changed at a plurality of timings.
It is characterized by
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. , effect execution means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B) for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added; A first storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM11) for storing data; a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data relating to character images; Moving image control means for controlling display (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.); image renderer 91AK146, etc.), and the data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, set by text display setting information). The character image control means controls the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image. element and can be changed (see, for example, FIG. 10-7), and further, suggestive effect execution that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state Means (for example, step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table containing super reach A to C and executes steps 097IWS106 and S305), and a specific image during execution of the suggestive effect (for example, chance up image) and a predetermined image (eg, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image (eg, Super Reach A to 06, S305 are executed at step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and the suggestive effect executing means includes a plurality of types of suggestive effects (e.g., super reach A to C), and the image display means displays, as the specific image, at least a first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed, and a second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, and image B3) can be displayed during execution of the second suggestive effect, and the specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and the specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than in the normal mode, and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16, the display modes of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 do not change), When displaying the specific image according to the special mode, the image display means displays the specific image by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors). When displaying the specific image in the normal mode, the specific image is displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) different from the first special effect element. (See FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16).
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the character image control means, when displaying a character image corresponding to a common first component during the display period, selects the second component related to the character image. It may be changeable (see eg Figure 10-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above, the character image control means uses information (for example, field data constituting a color field) common to the specific image different from the character image to control the character image. The second component of the character image may be changeable (see, eg, FIG. 10-6).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the character image control means controls a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group (for example, a text image indicating "Geki Atsushi"). ) can be displayed, and the second component related to the specific character image can be changed at a plurality of timings (see FIG. 10-8, for example).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the character image control means can individually change and display the first component and the second component related to the character image. (see, eg, FIG. 10-4).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(6) In any one of (1) to (5) above, the data in the second storage area may include outline data (such as outline font data) that can be used to display character images.
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(7) Glossy characters when a specific element is set as a character image constituent element in any one of the above (1) to (6) (for example, when the color field is "gold") In addition to displaying the image, it may be possible to add an effect image around the character image and display it (see, for example, FIG. 10-8).
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

(8) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above, when a special element is set as a character image component (for example, when the color field is "rainbow"), a predetermined range (for example, a character It is possible to display character images in which multiple display colors are changed sequentially (for example, red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, reddish purple, etc.) according to the internal coordinates, display time range, etc.). may
In such a configuration, appropriate display control is possible.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions relating to gaming machines of the following (9) to (15). Conventionally, in a game machine, it is possible to display a specific image during execution of a suggestive effect as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-136430, and a specific image in a normal mode and a state more advantageous than the normal mode. It is configured to be able to display a specific image in a special mode suggesting that the degree of expectation to be controlled is high, and to display the specific image by adding a special effect element when displaying the specific image in the special mode. There was something In such a game machine, when the specific image in the normal mode is displayed, the player recognizes that the specific image is a preview image whose mode changes according to the degree of expectation that the specific image will be controlled in an advantageous state. In view of this point, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image and to draw the player's attention to the specific image. There is a demand for the provision of gaming machines that allow

The gaming machine (9) is a gaming machine that performs a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a suggestive effect that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, super reach A ~ C) possible suggestive effect execution means (for example, step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU120 selects a process table containing super reach A ~ C and executes steps 097IWS106, S305) and image display means (for example, effect control step 097IWS104 in the CPU 120 for selecting a process table containing super reach A to C and chance-up effects and executing steps 097IWS106 and S305), and the suggestive effect execution means includes at least the first suggestive effect (for example, It is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects (for example, super reach A to C) including super reach A) and second suggestive effects (for example, super reach B), and the image display means displays at least the first It is possible to display a first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4) during execution of one suggestion effect, and display a second specific image (for example, image B1, image B1, image B1, etc.) during execution of a second suggestion effect. image B2, image B3) can be displayed, and a specific image in a normal mode (e.g., white) and a special mode (e.g., blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), and the predetermined image is a display mode unrelated to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, shown in FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16 , the display modes of the character images 097IW11 and 097IW21 do not change), and the image display means displays the first special effect elements (for example, blue, green, red, and rainbow colors) when displaying the specific image in the special mode. The specific image can be displayed by adding a display color effect image), and when displaying the specific image in the normal mode, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, a white display color effect image) can be added to display a specific image (see FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is the preview image, and to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9) above, the image display means has a different aspect (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color ) can display the first specific image, and a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors) in a display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image is added. 12-9 to 12-16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the mode of the specific image by the display mode of the added first special effect element.

(11) In the gaming machine of (9) or (10) above, the image display means is capable of displaying an image of a common aspect (for example, image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image, When displaying images in a common manner, the first specific image and the second specific image can be displayed by adding a common first special effect element (for example, an effect image with rainbow display colors) (FIG. 12). -4 and FIG. 12-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (11) above, when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the first special effect element, the notification effect (for example, output of notification sound) can be executed. A notification effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes step 097IWS311 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided, and the notification effect execution means executes the notification effect when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element. No (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not move to step 097IWS311 when Y in step 097IWS310). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware only when there is a high degree of expectation that the control will be in an advantageous state.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12) above, the image display means provides an effect ( For example, chance-up effects A7, B7, C5) may be executed (see FIGS. 12-4 to 12-6). According to such a configuration, even when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the second special effect element, the sense of anticipation can be maintained.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (13) above, the suggestive effect execution means includes effects in the first period (for example, effects in the first half of the effect periods of Super Reach A to C); A second period effect (for example, a super reach A to C effect period in the latter half of the effect period of super reach A to C) including an effect to notify whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state after the first period (for example, winning result notification) ), the image display means can display the specific image during the first period, and restricts the display of the specific image during the second period (see FIG. 12-8). ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be focused on whether or not the control is to be in an advantageous state.

(15) In the gaming machine of any one of (9) to (14) above, any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different advantages for the player can be set. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1), in which a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a CPU 120 for controlling the effect is capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) produces an effect during variable display , a setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, or a part that can execute a reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9), and the production mode of the predetermined production is in an advantageous state A special aspect that suggests being controlled (for example, a reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 that is a special pattern) and a specific aspect that suggests a setting (for example, a pattern PT-which is a specific pattern) 1 to PT-7), and the predetermined effect execution means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the variable display of the symbol is At the timing after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start (the timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect When the control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the effect determination process during variable display shown in FIGS. If the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, 103SGS301 , the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is prioritized over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, etc. / Production control CPU 120 , Reach notice (high) > Setting suggestion (high) > Reach notice (low) > Setting suggestion (low) The part that determines the execution of the production based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 ( 11 to 20 of modification 1))). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to execution of a predetermined performance in a specific manner when the control is performed in an advantageous state.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the numerical range corresponding to a 2nd special figure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing in game control main processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing related to the characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of operation effect determination processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the presence or absence of an operation effect and the number of times for the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determining the number of setting suggestions related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of a setting suggestion pattern related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determination of the number of times of value notification related to the characteristic part 60AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various production|presentation based on characteristic part 60AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an execution example of an operation presentation related to a characteristic portion 60AK; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control board which concerns on characteristic part 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a storage area related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table relating to feature parts 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a text display process table related to characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK; It is a figure which shows the example of text display control based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the text display setting information based on characteristic parts 91AK and 92AK. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a text display example related to characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory view showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing for determining effects during variable display; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the effect type during variable display; (A) is a diagram showing an effect (prediction of reach) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of effects during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (low) presentation mode based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing a ready-to-win announcement (high) presentation mode based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as Modified Example 1, and (B) is a diagram showing determination ratios of reach notice and setting suggestion when using effect type determination table C. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as a second embodiment, and (B) is a view showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at set values 1 and 6 with the fluctuation pattern normal reach, (B) is set with the fluctuation pattern super reach It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach and the setting value is 1 and setting value 6 in Example 3, and (B) is a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 in super reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the first period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Example 4; FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect determination processing as a fourth embodiment; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 with the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach in Example 4, (B) shows the fluctuation pattern A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 with super reach It is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of variable display effect type determination in the first period; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination rate of effect type during variable display in the second period when the variation pattern is super reach; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an effect period of an effect during variable display as Modified Example 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period at set value 1 and set value 6 common to all variation patterns in modification 2, (B) is a variation pattern normal reach / super reach A diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the second period at setting values 1 and 6 in common, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern common to normal reach and super reach, setting values 1 and 6 at setting values 1 and 6 It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in 3 periods. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a chance up production|presentation setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a chance up production|presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a chance up production|presentation determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a chance up production|presentation determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining display timings of a chance-up image and a win/fail result notification during execution of Super Reach; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a Super Reach effect mode;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the recovery time from the power failure, for example, in the image display device 5, it is determined that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. , the screen is displayed for notification. The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of features related to set values)
Characteristic portions relating to set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1 while being accommodated in a board case configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. ing. Although not shown, the main board 11 also includes a lock switch for switching to a set value change state in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot switch to be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as winning probability (ball-out rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Incidentally, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can check the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as the lock switch and the setting changeover switch, which can be operated by a staff member of the game arcade, are provided in the setting changeover body portion and housed together with the main board 11 in the board case. The lock switch and setting changeover switch are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case so that they can be operated without opening the substrate case.

A board case accommodating a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate the lock switch and the setting changeover switch when the game machine frame is closed. . In addition, since the lock switch requires operation of a setting key possessed by a game hall attendant or the like, it can only be operated by an administrator who possesses the setting key. The lock switch is also a switch that can be switched between ON and OFF with a setting key. Although the door key and the setting key are separate keys in the present embodiment, they may be combined into one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged in the substrate case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In this way, the display monitor is arranged in front when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame opened. However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display section, a second display section, a third display section, and a fourth display section. The 1st to 4th display parts of the display monitor are each composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. . The first to fourth display sections of the display monitor are capable of lighting or blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

As a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a game information display section may be provided at the lower left position of the game area. In the game information display section, a round indicator, a right-handed lamp, a probability variable lamp, and a time-saving lamp are collectively arranged. The round indicator can display the number of rounds of the big win game and the type of the big win during the big win game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-probability base state or a big-hit game state as a time-saving state. The variable probability lamp lights up when it is in the variable probability state. The time-saving lamp lights up when it is in the time-saving state. The round indicator consists of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. As for the setting value, 6, which is the largest value, is the most disadvantageous value for the game arcade side, and the smaller the set value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the more advantageous the game arcade side is. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. good too. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

8-1(A) and 8-1(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for each set value is set to the variable display result of the special symbol (special symbol display result). is. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0-65535. The display result determination table is not limited to using separate display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result determination common to the first special figure and the second special figure A table may be used.

When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result, 1020 ~ Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". When the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1383. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss". When the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "loss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the hit determination value compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. are assigned to the "big win", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to the "minor win", and other numerical ranges are assigned to the "loss".

In each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) are special figures of "jackpot" assigned to display results. As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/1 when the set value is 4). 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, 1/160 when the setting value is 3, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, and 1/140 when the setting value is 4. 1/120 for 5 and 1/100 for a set value of 6). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control to the jackpot game state is higher when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state (high probability state) than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state.

Depending on each setting value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the jackpot probability in the probability-variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state) is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability is 1.625 times)), and the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or time saving state at each setting value , may be set to a constant value (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state will be the same value. A judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control to the small winning game state as "small winning" may be varied. The special figure display result is not limited to a form with a different probability of being determined when controlling the special figure display result as a "small hit" according to the fluctuation special figure, and the special figure display result is " The probability that it is determined to control to the small hit game state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

FIGS. 8-2 to 8-5 show numerical ranges of hit determination values assigned to "big wins" and "minor wins" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 8-2 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 8-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state. FIG. 8-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 8-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. Thus, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range Only numbers within (1020-1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, numbers within the range of the common number range plus the non-common number range will be the "jackpot" assigned. The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range (1020 to 1674) of the big hit determination value, 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33094 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, if the set value is 1 While only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are " assigned to the jackpot. The non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the variable probability state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the numbers within the range of the common numeric range plus the non-common numeric range are assigned to the "jackpot" It is The non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the set value increases. For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the probability variable state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value is the big hit in the case of the set value of 6. In a numerical range different from the judgment value range (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set in the range of 32767 to 33421 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and setting value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range based on the hit judgment value of 1020 The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is judged as the small hit. As a numerical range of values, a variable display result is determined.

In each display result determination table, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same) be. In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each game state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big win game state is determined is the lowest, and the value of the set value is the lowest. Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: setting value 6 > setting value 5 > setting value 4 > setting value 3 > set value 2 > set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of the random number MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol wins (big hit). It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when the random number MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win. In this way, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIG. 8-1 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 are not limited to the configuration in which a total of six set values, ie, 1 to 6, are provided. Seven or more may be sufficient. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (increase in the probability of winning a big hit, making it easier to determine a specific type of big win, etc.). It may be arranged such that the smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself is not limited to a form that does not change, but the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

Next, the processing within the game control main processing in the characteristic portion regarding the set value will be described. FIG. 8-6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. ) and initial settings such as settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

When processing within the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, the process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

If the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A; if the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A , the process proceeds to step S3A.

At step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). If the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor is ON (step S4A). When the open sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? It is determined whether or not (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), a set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A, If the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), set value confirmation processing (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the open sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds directly to step S8A.

The set value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the game machine frame is open when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning it off. It is the process that takes place. In the setting value change process, a process of transmitting a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the contents of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary setting value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, According to the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing the provisional set value as an actual set value in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (clear switch is off) while the game machine frame is open. It is a process performed by In the setting value confirmation process, the process of transmitting a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, the display of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with A process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), and ending the display etc. according to the state of a lock switch, setting to the effect control board 12 A process of transmitting a value confirmation end notification command is performed.

It should be noted that in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, from the start of each process, the lighting of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round indicator, the first reservation indicator 25A, By starting the flashing of the second holding display 25B and the right-handed lamp, a player, a game hall staff member, or the like can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing or setting the set value. It is sufficient if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator may be any lighting mode, especially as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments forming the round indicator may be illuminated in different manners at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is to be cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (step S9A) is to be executed). (step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as other processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started by a cold start or is restored to the state before the power failure (started by a hot start) depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, for example. ), perform processing corresponding to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in addresses other than the first address (F000) where the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are stored. processing takes place. In the RAM clearing process, data other than the set values are not cleared, but when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the characteristic part 048AK of this embodiment) F003 and later of FXXX) may be cleared only.

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. In addition, only some of the segments may be blinked, or at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor may be lit. Also, in the processing within the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or that the power has been restored from a power failure during setting change, A process of transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Furthermore, the first display unit, second display unit, third display unit, and fourth display unit that constitute the display monitor are used to notify (error notification) that a set value abnormal error has occurred or that power has been restored from a power failure during setting change. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the sections. In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.). The monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may perform error occurrence notification.

In the processing within the game control main processing, after it is determined that the lock switch is ON in step S3A, when it is determined that the open sensor is OFF in step S4A, the opening of the gaming machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without being detected, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the set value can be stored in a identifiable manner. can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B Notify the occurrence of an error. , the staff of the game hall or the like can recognize from both the front side and the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 that an error has occurred or that the electricity has recovered from the power failure during the change of the setting value. . In addition, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 or the recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value. become.

As described above, the display result determination table provided in the pachinko game machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each setting value from 1238 The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are continuous. Since it is set to be a numerical value range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to each setting value. It suffices to determine whether or not it is within the numerical range of up to. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

The numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, so compared to the case where multiple numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided, random It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big-hit determination value (whether or not to control to the big-hit game state) multiple times. As a result, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or variable probability state, the hit determination value 1020 is used as the big hit reference value, and the big hit determination Since the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probability variable state It is sufficient to judge no. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the display result determination table, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of determination values included in the numerical range is 655, which is about double). On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It suffices to determine whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko game machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) that is different from the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within a numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. When it is determined whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state, the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. It should be determined whether or not Thereby, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
In the characteristic part 60AK, the number of times notification effect is executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. In the number-of-times notification effect, the number of times the operation effect is executed is notified. The operation effects are effects in which various advance notices, notifications, and suggestions are made when a player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is detected. The operation performance of the characteristic part 60AK includes a notice performance for notifying that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state, a value notification performance for notifying whether or not the variable probability state will be controlled after the jackpot game state is ended, and a pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加A setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in is included as an executable effect.

FIG. 9-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process processing as the variable display start setting processing regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop pattern and the like are determined (step 60AKS011). The final stop pattern is a fixed decorative pattern as a display result of variable display of decorative patterns, and is a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 or a variable display result notification command. It can be determined based on variable display content, such as the display result of the display. A variation pattern specification command and a variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 based on the setting by the variation pattern setting processing of the special symbol process processing. The variable display contents corresponding to the display results of the variable pattern and variable display are "non-reach (losing)", "normal reach (losing)", "super reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", "probability ( jackpot)" should be included. If the variable display content is any one of "non-reach (loss)", "normal reach (loss)", and "super reach (loss)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "loss". If the variable display content is either "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". In addition, when the variable display content is "normal reach (loss)" and when the variable display content is "super reach (loss)", the variable display content is collectively referred to as "reach (loss)". When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" and when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", the variable display content is collectively called "big hit".

If the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the variable display state of the decorative pattern will not be in the ready-to-win state, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a "failure". When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", after the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, the determined decorative pattern of the ready-to-lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "losing". becomes. If the variable display content is "Reach (Loss)", if the variable display content is "Normal Reach (Loss)", the "Normal" variation pattern will be used to create a reach effect, and the variable display content will be "Super Reach ( In the case of "losing)", a reach effect is executed according to the "super" variation pattern. When the variable display content is ``non-probability variation (big hit)'', the display result of the variable display is ``big hit'', and the jackpot type corresponds to ``non-probability variation'', and the game state after the end of the big win game state is shortened. state. When the variable display content is "variable probability (big hit)", the display result of the variable display is "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big win game state is the variable probability state corresponding to the "variable probability" of the jackpot type. Become. When the game state is a probability variable state, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" increases, and by being easily controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state, the game is played more than the normal state or the time saving state. A game value advantageous to the player is given.

The final stop pattern is determined so that when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R have different (mismatched) decorative patterns. be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, the determination is performed. Of the decorative symbols, the left finalized decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Of the symbols, the right finalized decoration symbol to be stop-displayed in the "right" decoration symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. Among the symbols, the medium-determined decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

The final stop pattern is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R when the variable display content is "reach (loss)". be. In this case, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left/right determined pattern updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to the prepared left/right determined pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, determination is performed. Among the decorative patterns, the decorative patterns having the same pattern number and displayed stopped together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like, and referring to a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc., a fixed decorative pattern Among them, the medium-determined decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the medium fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

The final stop pattern is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)". are determined to be the same (matching) decoration pattern. In this case, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to a table for determining a big hit fixed pattern prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, The decorative symbols having the same symbol number to be stop-displayed together in 5C and 5R may be determined. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the decorative symbols showing odd numbers) and the probability variable patterns (for example, the decorative symbols indicating odd numbers) should be determined as the fixed decorative symbols. In the promotion performance during the big win, after a combination of decorative symbols (non-variable big win combination) that reminds the player of the big win but not the variable probability state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the game is in the state of the big win or in the state of the big win game. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability variable (big hit)", a fixed decoration pattern is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed decoration pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variable (big win)'', the fixed decoration pattern is decided from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed in spite of the derivation display of all the probability variable symbols as the fixed decoration symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", in step 60AKS011, it is determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. may be broken. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the decorative patterns of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal patterns are once displayed during the variable display of the decorative patterns, so that the control to the variable probability state is made difficult, By variably displaying (re-varying) the decoration patterns again and stop-displaying the decoration patterns of the probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variation patterns, the player can be notified in a recognizable manner that the probability variation state is controlled. In some cases, the decoration symbols of the non-probability variation big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the decoration symbols are varied again in the re-lottery production, so that the control to the probability variation state may not be notified. When it is determined in step 60AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, the combination of decoration symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the execution of the re-lottery effect.

After determining the final stop symbol and the like, operation effect determination processing is executed (step 60AKS012). By the operation effect determination process, determination and setting for executing the operation effect and the number of times notification effect are performed. Then, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step 60AKS013). The production control pattern may include a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, an operation production control pattern, other notice production control patterns, and the like. For example, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, select one of the prepared special figure variation production control patterns and set it as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared operation effect control patterns may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the operation effect determination process of step 60AKS012. In addition, it is not limited to setting a separate production control pattern as the special figure fluctuation time production control pattern and the operation production control pattern, but one production control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution setting of each production is set. There may be. When the production control pattern is determined, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area (production control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set. (step 60AKS014). Also, a setting is made to start changing the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 60AKS015). At this time, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined in step 60AKS013 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is set (step 60AKS016). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display portion (leftmost display portion) corresponding to the pending number “1” is erased (digested), and other pending numbers “2” to The pending display in the display portion corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the pending display is shifted. In the active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5, active display corresponding to the erased (extinguished) pending display in the pending display area may be performed. In addition, when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second starting winning, the active display area will be displayed without updating the pending display. A setting may be made to update the active display in the . After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 60AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 9-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the operation effect determination process executed in step 60AKS012 of the variable display start setting process. In the operation effect determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021). The effect permission condition may be determined in advance as a condition under which execution of the operation effect is permitted. For example, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP ready-to-win which is super reach is executed according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specifying command, the effect permission condition may be established. Moreover, it is good also as one of the production|presentation permission conditions that it is a high probability high base state in a probability variable state. In this way, when the ready-to-win effect of the SP ready-to-win is executed in the high-probability-high base state, the effect permission condition may be established.

In the characteristic portion 60AK, SP reach A and SP reach B are prepared in advance as reach effects of super reach. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having different effects from each other. Each ready-to-win effect may include effects having a common effect mode. When the display result of the variable display is "big win", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal ready-to-win. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a "big win", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is higher than the ratio of executing to-win effect of SP ready-to-win A. When the display result of the variable display is "losing", the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Further, when the display result of the variable display is “losing”, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP reach-A becomes higher than the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B. According to the execution ratio of such a reach production, among the reach productions of super reach such as SP reach A and SP reach B, the reach production of SP reach B was executed more than the case where the reach production of SP reach A was executed. In this case, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases.

If the effect permission condition is not satisfied at step 60AKS021 (step 60AKS021; No), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect permission condition is established (step 60AKS021; Yes), the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined (step 60AKS022). The operation effect is executed according to whether or not it is to be executed, for example, by referring to an operation effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the operation effect execution. and the number of times of execution in the case of execution are determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining execution of the operation effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS022, the presence or absence and the number of operation effects are set to "no execution" in which no operation effect is executed, or "executed 5 times" in which the number of times the operation effect is executed is 5, and the number of times the operation effect is executed is 10 times. One of "10 executions" is determined.

Based on the determination result of step 60AKS022, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "not execute" that the operation effect is not executed (step 60AKS023). If it is determined that there is no execution (step 60AKS023; Yes), the operation effect determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no "execution" (step 60AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display is "big hit" (step 60AKS024). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step 60AKS024; Yes), the setting suggestion number of times is determined (step 60AKS025). The setting suggestion count indicates the number of operation effects executed as the setting suggestion effect among the plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS025, the setting suggestion frequency is determined by referring to a setting suggestion frequency determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion frequency. do it. Numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of setting suggestions may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . At step 60AKS025, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable", the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be zero. When the jackpot type is "variable probability", it depends on whether the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is "five times" or "ten times" is ten times. Therefore, the number of setting suggestions is determined at different ratios.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS025 is 0 (step 60AKS026). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS026; No), a suggested setting pattern is determined (step 60AKS027). The suggested setting pattern is determined by referring to a suggested setting pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the suggested setting pattern, and for each execution of the operation presentation. Any setting suggestion pattern may be determined among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for setting suggestion pattern determination may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

When the determination result in step 60AKS025 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS026; Yes), or after determining the suggested setting pattern in step 60AKS027, the number of times of value notification is determined (step 60AKS028). The number of times of value notification indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as value notification effects among a plurality of operation effects. In step 60AKS028, based on the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the number of times of value notification, the number of times of value notification is determined by referring to a table for determining the number of times of value notification, which is stored in advance and prepared in ROM 121. do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of times of notification of value may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 . In step 60AKS028, the value is calculated at a different rate depending on whether the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "5 times" or "10 times". The number of notifications is determined.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step 60AKS028 is 0 (step 60AKS029). At this time, if the determination result is determined to be other than 0 (step 60AKS029; No), the value notification pattern is determined (step 60AKS030). The value notification pattern is determined as one of a plurality of value notification patterns based on whether the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'' for each execution number of operation effects. It should be done.

When it is determined that the display result of the variable display is not "big hit" at step 60AKS024 (step 60AKS024; No), or when the determination result at step 60AKS028 is determined to be 0 (step 60AKS029; Yes), or After the value notification pattern is determined in step 60AKS030, the number of times of notice effects is set (step 60AKS031). The number of notice effects indicates the number of times of operation effects executed as notice effects among the plurality of operation effects. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the value notification effect and the setting suggestion effect are not executed, so the number of executions of the operation effect may be set as the number of advance notice effects. When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the remaining number of times after subtracting the setting suggestion number and the value notification number among the number of times of execution of the operation presentation may be set as the number of advance notice presentations. After step 60AKS031, after determining the notice effect pattern (step 60AKS032), the operation effect determination process is terminated. The notice effect pattern is determined by referring to a notice effect pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the notice effect pattern. Any one of the plurality of advance notice effect patterns may be determined. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the announcement effect pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter provided in the RAM 122 and the random number circuit 124 .

FIG. 9-3 shows an example of whether or not there is an operation effect and the number of times determined by step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process. At step 60AKS022 of the operation effect determination process, the presence or absence of the operation effect and the number of times are determined, for example, at a rate corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect. The content of the reach performance is determined corresponding to the display result of the variable display and the variation pattern, and is "SP reach A (big hit)", "SP reach B (big hit)", "SP reach A (loss)", "SP reach". B (losing)" should be included. If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "big hit". If the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP reach A (losing)" or "SP reach B (losing)", it is included when the display result of the variable display is "losing". When the ready-to-win effect content is either "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", SP ready-to-win A ready-to-win effect is executed as a super ready-to-win ready-to-win effect. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is either "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)" or "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the ready-to-win effect of SP ready-to-win B is executed as the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-3, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is five times at a higher rate than when the display result of the variable display is "loss". or "executed 10 times" is determined to be 10 times. For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)" or "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 50/100. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big win)" or "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", the determination ratio of "no execution" for not executing the operation effect is 20/100. Thus, when the operation performance is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state is increased compared to when the operation performance is not executed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is increased.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-3, when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-B is executed, the number of times of execution of the operation effect is set to 10 at a higher rate than when the ready-to-reach effect of SP reach-A is executed. It is decided to "execute 10 times". For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 40/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 60/100 when the number of times to execute the operation effect is 10 times. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 10/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. On the other hand, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", the determination ratio of "perform 10 times" is 20/100 when the number of times of executing the operation effect is 10 times. Of the ready-to-win performances of super ready-to-win, when the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-reach B is executed than when to-win performance of SP ready-to-win A is executed, the degree of expectation for big win is higher. Therefore, when the number of executions of the operation performance is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of execution of the ready-to-win performance of SP ready-to-win B, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the ready-to-win performance of SP to-win A, is increased. It effectively raises people's expectations. Further, as the number of executions of the operation presentation increases, the ratio of control to the big win game state as an advantageous state increases, and the degree of expectation for big win increases.

FIG. 9-4 shows an example of setting suggestion count determination in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 9-4(A) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "five-time execution" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 9-4(B) shows an example of determining the setting suggestion number in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times. At step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, the setting suggestion number is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed and the jackpot type. The jackpot types include ``non-probability variation'' when not controlled to the probability variation state and ``probability variation'' when controlled to the probability variation state according to the game state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. When controlled to the variable probability state, the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" at a higher rate than when not controlled to the variable probability state, and it is easy for the player to be controlled again to the big win game state as an advantageous state. Advantageous game value is given.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-4, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is determined that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation". For example, in both cases of “5 times execution” and “10 times execution”, if the jackpot type is “non-probability variation”, the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 100/100. Suggestions are not executed. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "Variable Probability", it is possible to determine the number of set suggestion times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the case of "5 times execution" and the case of "10 times execution". More specifically, in the case of "5 times execution", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 70/100. 30/100. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the jackpot type is "probability variation", the decision ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 0 is 10/100, and the decision rate of setting the suggested number of times to 1 is 15/100. , the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 2 is 20/100, the determination ratio of setting the suggested number of times to 3 is 25/100, and the determination rate of setting the suggested number of times to 4 is 30/100. Therefore, when the number of times of execution of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect with the number of times of setting suggestion other than 0 is increased. In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any of 2 to 4, which is the number of setting suggestions that are not determined in the case of 5 times, and more setting suggestions. The rate at which the production is executed is increased.

In this way, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", it is possible to execute setting suggestion production at a higher rate than "non-probability variation", so it is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" In the case of "probability variation", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big win game state. In addition, only in the case of "probable variation", which is the most advantageous jackpot type among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is performed. become viable. Among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, within a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance as a setting suggestion performance at a predetermined rate. In the range controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type "unprobability variable" with a low advantage, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the operation performance as the setting suggestive performance is not executed. Alternatively, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, in a range controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, it is possible to execute an operation performance that is a setting suggestion performance at a high rate. On the other hand, in the range controlled to the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the "unprobable variation" of the jackpot type with a low degree of advantage, there is a limit as a limit that the operation production that becomes the setting suggestion production can be executed at a low rate. may

FIG. 9-5 shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this configuration example, setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. Suggestion contents and corresponding characters are defined differently according to a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content is the content of the setting value suggested according to the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. The corresponding character is a character indicated by an effect image displayed when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC1, corresponding to the case where the set value is an odd number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation with odd number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH1. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2, corresponding to the case where the set value is an even number and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high degree of expectation for even number setting" and the corresponding character is the character CH2. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC3, corresponding to the case where the set value is high setting (large value) and the degree of expectation is high, the content of suggestion is "high setting, high degree of expectation", and the corresponding character is the character CH3. In the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4, corresponding to the case where the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more, the content of the suggestion is "the setting value is confirmed to be 2 or more", and the corresponding character is the character CH4. In the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5, corresponding to the case where the set value is determined to be the highest value of 6, the suggested content is "the highest set value is determined" and the corresponding character is the character CH5. In this way, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 makes it possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value is the most advantageous for the player.

FIG. 9-6 shows an example of setting suggestion patterns determined by step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 9-6(A) shows a determination example in the case of the final operation effect in the operation effect of a plurality of times. Figure 9-6 (B1) and Figure 9-6 (B2) show an example of determination in the case of an operation effect other than the final one in a plurality of operation effects, and Figure 9-6 (B1) shows a setting suggestion pattern FIG. 9-6B2 is an example of determination when 60AKC4 is undetermined as a usage pattern, and FIG. 9-6B2 is an example of determination when setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has been determined as a usage pattern. In step 60AKS027 of the operation effect determination process, setting suggestion patterns, which are usage patterns, are determined at a rate corresponding to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 from the final operation effect to the previous operation effect. Here, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 corresponds to the final operation effect, and when the setting value is 6, the determination ratio is 5/100, and in other cases, the determination ratio is 0/100. It becomes impossible to decide. Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggesting effect by the setting suggesting pattern 60AKC5, which suggests that the set value has the highest degree of advantage for the player, is the final operation effect. , and is not executed as an operation effect other than the final time. As a result, of the first timing and the second timing at which setting suggestion effects can be executed a plurality of times, the second timing, which is later than the first timing, has a higher rate of advantage for the player than the first timing. is the highest setting value.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-6, the determination ratio of the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100 when the setting value is 2 or more corresponding to the final operation effect. Further, if the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is undetermined for the operation effects other than the final round, and if the set value is 2 or more, the determination ratio of the suggestive setting pattern 60AKC4 is 5/100. On the other hand, if the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined for the operation effects other than the final round, the determination ratio of the suggested setting pattern 60AKC4 becomes 0/100 regardless of the set value, and determination is impossible. . Therefore, when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is executed once at a predetermined ratio as one of the operation effects, and then executed again or repeatedly in the same mode. prevent it from being done. In this way, when the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is performed at a predetermined rate within a range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has not yet been executed. becomes executable.

On the other hand, in the case where the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 is not executed in the range where the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been executed. A limit is set as a limit. Further, since the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed only as the final operation effect, it is executed as the final setting suggestion effect when the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times. In the range where the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is performed, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be executed at a predetermined rate, while the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is not executed in the range where it is executed as the setting suggestion effect other than the final episode. Restrictions are provided as limitations. In this way, when an operation effect that is a setting-suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, the setting-suggestion effect by the setting-suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5 is performed at a predetermined rate within the range of being executed as one setting-suggestion effect. While it can be executed, there is a limit as a limit that it becomes impossible to execute within the range where it is executed as a setting suggestion effect multiple times. When an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times, among the setting suggestion effects by the plurality of setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5, the range of setting suggestion effects by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC3 is performed in the same mode. While it may be executed, within the range of the setting suggestion rendering by the setting suggestion patterns 60AKC4 and 60AKC5, there is a limit as a limit that it is not executed in the same mode.

FIG. 9-7 shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. Among them, FIG. 9A shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "executed five times" in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is five. FIG. 9-7(B) shows an example of determination of the number of times of value notification in the case of "10 executions" in which the number of executions of the operation presentation is 10 times. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, the number of times of value notification is determined at a rate corresponding to the number of times of execution of the operation effect and the number of setting suggestions. The setting suggestion number is determined by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process to be 0 or 1 if the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "executed 5 times", and 0 if the number of times of execution of the operation effect is "executed 10 times". to 4.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-7, the value notification frequency is determined so that the value notification effect is executed when the set suggestion frequency is other than zero. For example, in the case of "executed 5 times", if the set suggested number of times is 1, the determination ratio of the number of times of value notification to 1 is 100/100, and the value notification effect is always executed once. In the case of "execute 10 times", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0 (one of 1 to 4), the value notification number is determined to be one of 1 to 4 at a predetermined ratio. More specifically, in the case of "10 executions", if the setting suggestion number is other than 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 55/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 2 is 55/100. 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 15/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 10/100. Therefore, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, the set value can be suggested by the setting suggestion effect. The setting suggesting performance can be executed at a predetermined ratio when controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to "probability variation" of a jackpot type with a high degree of advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states. In this case, it is possible to notify that a game value advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, and to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect. As a result, the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the range in which the operation effect as the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect as the value notification effect is not executed. There is a limit as a limit that cannot be done. In addition, the operation effect that is the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a high rate in the range where the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed, while the operation effect that is the value notification effect is not executed. A limit may be provided as a limit to what can be done with

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-7, the number of times of value notification is determined so as to provide a case where the value notification effect is not executed when the number of setting suggestions is zero. For example, in the case of “five times execution”, if the setting suggestion number is 0, the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 0 is 70/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of times of value notification to 1 is 30/100. be. In the case of "executed 10 times", if the set suggestion number is 0, the determination ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 0 is 10/100, and the decision ratio of setting the number of value notifications to 1 is 15/100, The determination ratio of 2 times of value notification is 20/100, the determination ratio of 3 times of value notification is 25/100, and the determination ratio of 4 times of value notification is 30/100. As a result, when the operation effect is executed a plurality of times, the operation effect such as the setting suggestion effect or the value notification effect is not executed, and after the operation effect is completed, the display result of the variable display is "big hit". ” can be provided. Therefore, during the execution of the variable display, even if the number of times of execution of the operation effect reaches the number of times notified by the number of times notification effect and the execution of the operation effect ends, there is a possibility that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit". is left, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being lost due to the end of the operation presentation.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-7, it is possible to determine the number of value notification times other than 0 at a ratio corresponding to the cases of "five times execution" and "ten times execution". Then, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, the number of times of value notification is set to other than 0 so that the ratio of execution of the value notification effect is increased. For example, in the case of "executed five times", the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestion count to be set to 1 other than 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. On the other hand, in the case of "executed 10 times", the ratio of setting suggestion times to values other than 0 is higher than the ratio of setting suggestions to 0 by step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process. In the case of "executed 5 times", if the setting suggestion number is 0, the ratio of the value notification number being determined to be 1 other than 0 is higher than the ratio of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process. expensive. In the case of "executed 10 times", even if the set suggestion number is 0, the rate of the value notification number being determined to be other than 0 is higher than the rate of being determined to be 0 by step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination processing. . With such a setting, in the case of "execution of 10 times", in which the number of times of execution of the operation effect is larger than that of "execution of 5 times", the rate at which the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0 increases, and the value notification effect is executed. increase the rate of In addition, when the number of executions of the operation effect is 10 times, which is more than 5 times, it is possible to determine any one of 2 to 4, which is the number of value notification times that is not determined in the case of 5 times, and more value notification is possible. What is necessary is just to make it possible to raise the ratio with which production|presentation is performed.

According to steps 60AKS025 and 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, in the case of "executed 5 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be 0, and the ratio of neither the setting suggestion effect nor the value notification effect to be executed is high. In the case of "executed 10 times", the number of times of setting suggestion and the number of times of value notification are both determined to be other than 0, and the ratio of both the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect to be executed increases. In this way, as the number of executions of the operation effects increases, the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effects and the value notification effects may be increased. Further, when the number of executions of operation effects is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, setting suggesting effects and value notification effects may be executed at a higher rate than when the number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the setting suggestion effect and the value notification effect according to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 9-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. In the variable display production process, for example, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed (step 60AKS041). At this time, the timer value of the production control process timer is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update, the variable display time It should be judged that it has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 60AKS041; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, or blinked. It is sufficient that various effects can be executed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect, or by combining some or all of them.

In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 9-8, it is determined whether or not it is the number of times notification effect period (step 60AKS042). The number-of-times notification effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. When it is determined that it is the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; Yes), control is performed to execute the number-of-times notification effect (step 60AKS043). By the control of step 60AKS043, it becomes possible to execute the number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of times the operation effect is executed.

If it is determined at step 60AKS042 that it is not the number-of-times notification effect period (step 60AKS042; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS043, it is determined whether or not it is the notice effect period (step 60AKS044). The notice effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The notice effect period corresponding to the operation effect may be determined in advance so as to be later than the number-of-times notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the advance notice effect period (step 60AKS044; Yes), control is performed to execute the notice effect (step 60AKS045). By the control of step 60AKS045, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the advance notice effect.

When it is determined that it is not the advance notice effect period at step 60AKS044 (step 60AKS044; No), or after performing the control of step 60AKS045, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046). Reach production period, for example in the production control pattern (special figure fluctuation time production control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, it may be determined in advance. The ready-to-win effect period may be set so as to come later than the advance notice effect period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the advance notice effect period. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step 60AKS046; Yes), control to execute the ready-to-win effect is performed (step 60AKS047). By the control of step 60AKS047, the ready-to-win effect can be executed.

When it is judged that it is not the ready-to-win effect period in step 60AKS046 (step 60AKS046; No), and after performing the control of step 60AKS047, it is judged whether or not it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048). The jackpot notification period may be predetermined in the production control pattern (such as the special figure fluctuation production control pattern) determined at step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, for example. The big hit notification period may be set in advance so as to be after the ready-to-win effect period. When it is determined that it is the jackpot notification period (step 60AKS048; Yes), control is performed to execute a jackpot notification effect (step 60AKS049). By the control of step 60AKS049, it becomes possible to notify that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state in a predetermined period during execution of the variable display.

When it is determined that it is not the jackpot notification period at step 60AKS048 (step 60AKS048; No), and after performing the control at step 60AKS049, it is determined whether or not it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050). The value notification effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (operation effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 60AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. The value notification effect period may be set so as to be later than the jackpot notification period, or may be set so as to include at least part of the jackpot notification period. When it is determined that it is the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; Yes), control is performed to execute the value notification effect (step 60AKS051). By the control of step 60AKS051, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the value notification effect.

If it is determined at step 60AKS050 that it is not the value notification effect period (step 60AKS050; No), or after performing the control at step 60AKS051, it is determined whether or not it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052). The setting suggestion effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern during the big hit. The setting suggestion effect period should be set so as to be later than the value notification effect period. When it is determined that it is the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; Yes), control is performed to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 60AKS053). By the control of step 60AKS053, it becomes possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. If it is determined in step 60AKS052 that it is not the setting suggestion effect period (step 60AKS052; No), after performing the control in step 60AKS053, for example, in the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute effects during variable display including the variable display operation of decorative symbols (step 60AKS054), and then the process for effects during variable display is terminated.

When it is determined at step 60AKS041 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 60AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 60AKS055). At this time, if the pattern confirmation command is not received (step 60AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits. After the variable display time elapses, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving the pattern confirmation command, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the fact that the pattern confirmation command could not be received normally. You may do so. When the pattern confirmation command is received (step 60AKS055; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, which results in a variable display of the decorative pattern. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (determined decorative symbol) is performed (step 60AKS056). Subsequently, a certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step 60AKS057). Also, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step 60AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 9-9 shows execution periods and execution timings of various effects with respect to the characteristic portion 60AK. Among them, FIG. 9-9(A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of variable display of decorative patterns. FIG. 9-9(B) shows execution periods and execution timings of operation-related effects including number-of-times notification effects and operation effects. When the variable display is started at timing T0, it becomes a number-of-times notification effect period. During the number-of-times notification effect period, the number-of-times notification effect is executed by the control in step 60AKS043 of the effect processing during variable display.

After that, when the number-of-times notification effect period ends at timing T1, it becomes a notice effect period. During the notice effect period, the operation effect, which is the notice effect, can be executed by the control in step 60AKS045 of the effect processing during variable display. For example, when an operation effect that is a plurality of advance notice effects is executed, each time advance notice effect included in the multiple advance notice effects, such as the first notice, the second notice, etc., is executed in order. . The notice effect period is not only the period in which the pre-reach variation is performed before the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, but also the post-reach variation after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-reach mode. part of the period may be included. By executing the operation effect as the notice effect during the notice effect period, the display result of the variable display is changed to "big hit" based on the detection of the action of the player such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example. It becomes possible to execute a performance that foretells what will happen.

In the variable display of the decorative symbols, for example, when the determined decorative symbols of the big winning combination are stopped and displayed, the big winning notification is executed at timing T2. In the effect process during variable display, when it is determined in step 60AKS048 that it is the jackpot notification period, the control in step 60AKS049 enables execution of the jackpot notification effect. At this time, it becomes a value notification performance period. During the value notification effect period, the control in step 60AKS051 of the variable display effect process enables execution of the operation effect as the value notification effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a value notification effect is executed multiple times, each value notification effect included in the value notification effect of multiple times, such as the first notification, the second notification, etc., is executed in order. executed. By executing the operation performance as the value reporting performance during the value reporting performance period, based on detection of the action of the player, such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the probability variable state is set. It becomes possible to execute an effect for informing whether or not to be controlled.

Subsequently, special time notification is executed at timing T3, and the setting suggestion effect period begins. During the setting suggesting effect period, the control in step 60AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display makes it possible to execute the operation effect as the setting suggesting effect. For example, when an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed multiple times, each setting suggestion effect included in the setting suggestion effect such as the first suggestion, the second suggestion, . . . executed. By executing the operation effect as the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion effect period, based on the detection of the player's action such as the pressing operation of the push button 31B, for example, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 It becomes possible to execute a production that makes a suggestion. After that, when the timing T4 is reached, the variable display ends, the big win starts, and the control of the big win game state is started.

In this way, when operation effects are executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide a number-of-times notification effect period, an advance notice effect period, a value notification effect period, and a setting suggestion effect period. In the number-of-times notification effect period, a number-of-times notification effect for performing notification corresponding to the number of executions of the operation effect is executed. During the notice performance period, an operation performance serving as a notice performance for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed. During the value notification effect period, an operation effect is executed as a value notification effect for informing whether or not the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In the setting suggestion effect period, an operation effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed. When the number of times of value notification is 0, the value notification effect period may not be provided, and when the number of times of setting suggestion is 0, the setting suggestion effect period may not be provided.

The advance notice effect period and the value notification effect period are included in the predetermined period during which the operation effect can be executed. The setting suggestion effect period is included in the specific period during which the operation effect can be executed after the predetermined period has elapsed. The value notification effect period is started when the big hit notification is performed at timing T2. The big-hit notification by the big-hit notification performance makes it possible to notify that it is controlled to the big-hit game state in a predetermined period. The setting suggestive effect can be executed as an operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period when the big win is reported at the timing T2.

In step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, when the jackpot type is "probability variation", the setting suggestion frequency is determined to be other than 0 at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", and the setting suggestion effect is performed. Feasibly determined. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change", the jackpot type is controlled to a jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with a high degree of advantage, A predetermined period elapses at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with the low advantage is performed when the notification of the control to the jackpot game state with the high advantage is performed by the value notification performance. In a later specific period, it becomes possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode.

Even when an operation performance such as a notice performance or a value notification performance is made executable in a prescribed period, it is difficult to raise a player's expectation after the prescribed period elapses when these operation performances are terminated. On the other hand, according to the present invention, it is possible to execute the setting suggestive effect as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. As expected from the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode, the performance can be diversified and the game interest can be improved.

Further, in step 60AKS025 of the operation effect determination process, only when the jackpot type is "probability variable", the setting suggestion number is determined to be other than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is determined to be executable. In step 60AKS028 of the operation effect determination process, when the setting suggestion frequency is other than 0, the value notification frequency is determined to be other than 0, and it is determined that the value notification effect can be executed. Therefore, according to being controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "probability change" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states such as "non-probability change" or "probability change". Only when the value notification performance is controlled to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage, the setting suggestion performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. Become.

In general, it is difficult to raise the player's expectation even more after the notification that the game is controlled to a high-advantage jackpot game state is performed. On the other hand, the present invention makes it possible to execute the setting suggestion effect as the operation effect of the suggestion effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period, and provides a case where the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is suggested. Even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to expect the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode, thereby improving the game interest.

9-10 and 9-11 show an execution example of operation effects. In this execution example, the number of executions of the operation presentation is determined to be "10 times", and the number of times of value notification and the number of setting suggestions are both determined to be two. Therefore, after the operation performance serving as the notice performance is executed six times, the notice performance period ends and the big win is announced. FIG. 9-10(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD1 when the big win notification is executed by the big win notification effect. At this time, a big hit notification effect including display of a message such as "battle win!" and display of a effect image showing a character is executed. In addition, a normal pattern representing the number "6" is displayed as a decorative pattern stopped and displayed together in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. As the remaining number of executions of the operation effect, an effect image indicating "remaining number of operations: 4" is also displayed. When the decoration pattern of the non-probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbols is displayed, the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot game state corresponding to the "non-probability variable", giving the impression that it is not controlled to the probability variable state. , given to the player.

FIG. 9-10(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD2 when the value notification effect period is started. At this time, a message indicating 4, which is the remaining number of operation effects, is displayed as the executable number of the operation effects as the value notification effect. FIG. 9-10(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD3 when the first value notification effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 9-10(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD4 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the big hit type is "probability variable" is not notified, so that the probability variable state after the end of the big hit game state A failure notification effect that gives an impression of being uncontrolled is executed. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 3” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 9-10(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD5 when the second value notification effect is started. At this time, similarly to the case where the first value notification effect is started, an effect image showing the push button 31B is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B. FIG. 9-10(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD6 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second value notification effect. Here, based on the detection of the action of the player, which is the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the fact that the jackpot type is "variable probability" is performed, so that the variable probability state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. A success notification effect for notifying that it is controlled is executed. In addition, as decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed together in the "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the normal design that indicates the number "6" is a probability variation design that indicates the number "7". changed and displayed. When the decoration pattern of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variable symbols is displayed, the big win type is controlled to the big win game state corresponding to "variable probability", and the player is informed that it is controlled to the variable probability state. becomes recognizable. In addition, an effect image indicating “remaining number of operations: 2” is displayed as the remaining number of executions of the operation effect.

FIG. 9-10(G) shows an effect execution example 60AKD7 when the setting suggestion effect period is started. At this time, along with notification of the special time, a message is displayed that notifies 2, which is the remaining number of operation effects, as the number of executable times of the operation effects as setting suggestion effects.

FIG. 9-11(A) shows an effect execution example 60AKD8 when the first setting suggestion effect is started. In this case, by displaying an effect image indicating the push button 31B together with the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, the player's action such as pressing the push button 31B is prompted. FIG. 9-11(B) shows an effect execution example 60AKD9 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the first setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH2, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC2. By displaying the characters CH1 to CH5 corresponding to the suggested setting patterns 60AKC1 to 60AKC5 in order on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, the advantage corresponding to the character indicated by the displayed effect image can be displayed. , are recognizable by the player.

FIG. 9-11(C) shows an effect execution example 60AKD10 when the second setting suggestion effect is started. At this time, as in the case where the first setting suggestion effect is started, the effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion effect and the effect image showing the push button 31B are displayed, and the player can press the push button 31B. action is prompted. FIG. 9-11(D) shows an effect execution example 60AKD11 when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected in the second setting suggestion effect. In this case, an effect image showing the character CH4, which is the corresponding character, is displayed as the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4. FIG. 9-11(E) shows an effect execution example 60AKD12 when the setting suggestion effect period ends. At this time, the display result of the corresponding character in the setting suggestion effect that has already been executed may be displayed so that the player can recognize it. FIG. 9-11(F) shows an effect execution example 60AKD13 in the case of stop-displaying decoration symbols of a probability variable big hit combination which is a fixed decoration symbol in response to the end of the variable display. After that, based on the display result of the variable display being "big hit", the control of the big win game state is started.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 9-4, for example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", at a higher rate than when the jackpot type is "probability variation", setting suggestion production may be determined feasibly. In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-4, the setting suggestion number may be determined by the ratio of the case where the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" and "probability variation" are interchanged. In this way, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", if the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than "probability variation", the jackpot type is less advantageous than the case of "probability variation" In the case of a certain "non-probability variable", it becomes possible to execute an operation effect that is a setting suggestion effect at a high rate in response to being controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, only in the case of "non-probability variation", which is the jackpot type with the lowest degree of advantage among multiple types of jackpot gaming states such as "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", the operation performance that becomes the setting suggestion performance may be made executable. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

As a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage, the jackpot types may be controllable to jackpot game states with different numbers of rounds instead of the jackpot game states with "non-probability variable" or "probability variable". For example, "4R" with 4 rounds, "6R" with 6 rounds, "8R" with 8 rounds, and "10R" with 10 rounds. may be provided. In this case, as the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire increases, so the player's advantage should be increased. The value notification effect may be a effect of notifying the number of prize balls that the player can acquire according to the number of rounds. Also in such a case, among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage, there is a notification that is controlled to a jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage by the value notification effect. When it is performed, the set suggestive performance is set as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of being controlled to the jackpot game state with a low advantage is performed. Make it executable. In addition, in accordance with the control to the jackpot game state with the highest degree of advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, the value notification effect is performed to notify that the jackpot game state is controlled to the highest degree of advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

On the other hand, in response to being controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage among a plurality of kinds of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to inform the player that the jackpot game state is controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage. In this case, the set suggestive performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the notification of controlling to the jackpot game state with a high degree of advantage is performed. may Alternatively, in response to being controlled to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage among a plurality of types of jackpot game states, a value notification effect is performed to control to the jackpot game state with the lowest advantage. Only in this case, the setting suggestive effect may be executable as the operation effect of the suggestive effect mode in a specific period after the lapse of the predetermined period. In these cases as well, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to expect the operation effects of the suggestive effect mode.

In addition, the player's advantage in a plurality of kinds of advantageous states may be varied according to whether or not any game value is awarded and the content of the game value to be awarded. For example, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state. Alternatively, when the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the player's advantage may be varied by varying the jackpot probability in the variable probability state. The player's advantage may be varied by varying the number of consecutive wins, which is the number of times the game is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, the value that can be imparted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the game value related to the execution of the game itself. It may include part or all of executing a specific effect, such as playing a sound or displaying an image showing a two-dimensional code. The image indicating the two-dimensional code may include information that enables acquisition of predetermined digital content by photographing with a terminal device (portable terminal) possessed by the player. Values that can be imparted in the pachinko game machine 1 may include performance points different from those for executing a specific performance.

The number of executions of the operation effect is not limited to the case of "executed 5 times", which is 5 times, or the case of "executed 10 times", which is 10 times. It is acceptable if it can be set. Also in this case, when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is large, the number of times of setting suggestion may be set to other than 0 at a higher rate than when the number of times of execution of the operation presentation is small so that the setting suggestion presentation can be executed. In addition, when the number of times of execution of operation effects is large, it is possible to set the setting suggestion number of times that is not determined when the number of times of execution of operation effects is small, or to increase the ratio of executing more setting suggestion effects. may

Instead of the decision example shown in FIG. 9-6, a restriction may be provided so that the setting suggestion rendering by the same setting suggestion pattern is not executed for all of the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. In addition, regardless of whether or not the operation presentation is the final round, and whether or not the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC4 has already been determined, the setting suggestion pattern is determined at the common determination ratio, and then the predetermined difference is determined. When the replacement condition is satisfied, the determined setting suggestion pattern may be replaced with another setting suggestion pattern, thereby restricting the execution of the setting suggestion performance based on the same setting suggestion pattern. Alternatively, a setting suggestion effect based on the same setting suggestion pattern may be repetitively executed for a plurality of setting suggestion patterns.

The setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be determined at different ratios depending on, for example, the number of setting suggestions, not only whether or not it is the final operation effect. When the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the confirmation notification that the set value is 6 may be easily executed. Alternatively, when the setting suggestion count is large, the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 can be determined at a lower rate than when the setting suggestion count is small, and the confirmation notification that the setting value is 6 may be difficult to execute. .

A setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by the same setting suggestion pattern until a predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied after being executed once. . For example, in a period in which the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled to the normal state, the cancellation condition is not established, and after the setting suggestion performance by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed once, the same setting suggestion pattern is executed. It may be restricted so that it is not executed as a setting suggestion effect by. When the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is executed, it is confirmed that the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and it becomes possible to recognize that the set value has a high advantage for the player. , it is possible to increase the rarity of such a setting suggestion effect and improve the game interest.

Instead of the setting suggesting effect, or when an operation effect serving as a notice effect is executed together with the setting suggesting effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested. For example, as the plurality of notice effect patterns, there are notice effect patterns with different decision ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko game machine 1, and notice effect patterns that can be determined only when the set values in the pachinko game machine 1 are specific values. may be provided. More specifically, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is possible to decide on a notice performance pattern that notifies a message of "reliability 66%", or the decision ratio of the notice performance pattern is increased. Thus, it is sufficient that the determined values in the announcement effect pattern determination table are assigned to a plurality of announcement effect patterns. By executing the operation performance as the advance notice performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the advance notice performance can be executed as the operation performance of the suggestive performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. becomes. In addition to the operation effect that is the advance notice effect, the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be suggested when the operation effect that is the value notification effect is executed. By executing the operation performance as the value notification performance and suggesting the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the value notification performance is performed as the operation performance of the suggestion performance mode in a predetermined period before the specific period. become executable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the operation performances for giving advance notice and information, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In the operation effect determination process shown in FIG. 9B, instead of steps 60AKS025 to 60AKS029, the number of times of value notification may be determined and then the number of setting suggestions may be determined. In this case, when the number of times of value notification is determined to be other than 0, the number of times of setting suggestion can be determined, and when the number of times of value notification is determined to be 0, the number of times of setting suggestion is not determined, and a setting suggestion effect is produced. may not be executed. In this way, when it is reported whether or not a game value that is advantageous to the player is given by the value notification effect, it is only necessary to suggest the setting value by the setting suggestion effect.

The setting suggesting effect is not limited to an effect suggesting a setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, and may be an effect suggesting whether or not the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 has been changed, for example. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include setting suggestion patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed, the setting suggestion performance is executed by the setting suggestion pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed. , the performance can be diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved.

At least part of the predetermined period or part or all of the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the operation effect that is the advance notice effect is executed, and the operation effect that is the value notification effect and the setting suggesting effect does not have to be executed. After that, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the value notification production is performed along with the execution of the big hit start production (fanfare production) and the production during the big hit (production corresponding to the first and second rounds, etc.) Alternatively, an operation effect that serves as a setting suggesting effect may be made executable. The operation effects such as the advance notice effect, the value notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect may be executable in any order. A case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed without executing the value notification effect.

In addition to the pressing operation on the push button 31B, the operation effect may be executed based on detection of a tilting operation on the stick controller 31A. When the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is executed, the effect mode in which the player's advantage is high at a higher rate than when the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed. good. For example, the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion pattern 60AKC5 is such that the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the push button 31B is 0/100 and the ratio of determination of the operation effect using the stick controller 31A is 100/100. A determined value in the pattern determination table may be assigned to multiple setting suggestion patterns.

The configuration for detecting the action of the player is not limited to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. may be possible. Further, a sensor capable of detecting any action other than the action of inputting an instruction by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. An arbitrary action may be detected as a predetermined operation by analyzing the result of photographing an object such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). That is, the configuration for detecting the action of the player may be any configuration that can detect the action of any object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

Various restrictions may be based on arbitrary ranges and limits as long as they do not deviate from the objectives, problems to be solved, and other gist of the present invention. The range of restrictions may be any condition that makes the presence or absence, ratio, or other amount of processing, control, or action execution different. Any content that is different (for example, whether to stop or reduce, degree of reduction, etc.) may be used.

(Description of Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 60AK)
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine 1 that is advantageous to the player, for example, can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, and a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, from 1 to 6. A setting means such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value change process of FIGS. Based on the detection of the action of the player, for example, the processing of steps 60AKS045, 60AKS051, 60AKS053 shown in FIG. Action effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120, and a notification corresponding to the number of times the action effect is executed, for example, the process of step 60AKS043 shown in FIG. 9-8 can be executed. In the execution pattern of the action effect by the action effect executing means, the action effect of the number of times indicated in the notification effect is executed within a predetermined period, for example, variable display A first execution pattern such as when the result is not a "jackpot" or when the set suggestion number of times is determined to be 0, and an action performance with a smaller number of execution times than indicated in the notification performance are executed within a predetermined period. , and a second execution pattern in which, after the predetermined period of time has passed, the action rendering of the remaining number of executions is executed, for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and the set suggestion number determination result is other than 0. , the action effect executing means, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is viable. As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

Equipped with advantageous notification means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 60AKS049 shown in FIG. When the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in the processing of step 60AKS024 shown in 9-2, when the notification by the advantageous notification means such as the part that executes the processing of step 60AKS025 is performed, a predetermined period of time In a specific period after the elapse, it may be possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to draw attention to the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. 9-4, for example, when the advantageous notification means notifies that the second advantageous state is controlled. may be able to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in the specific period at a higher rate than when the advantageous notification means reports that the control to the first advantageous state is performed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As advantageous states, for example, a first advantageous state such as when the jackpot type is "non-variable", and a second advantageous state, such as when the jackpot type is "variable", is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states including, and the operation effect execution means is, for example, when the jackpot types shown in FIG. When the notification of being controlled to the first advantageous state by means of the It may be possible to execute the action rendering of the rendering mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

As the advantageous state, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states, such as different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, the type of jackpot is either ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation''. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, it is possible to execute the action rendering of the suggestive rendering mode in a specific period only when the advantageous notification means reports that control is to be performed in the advantageous state with the highest degree of advantage. may As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances and improve the amusement of the game so as to expect the action performances of the suggestive performance mode.

The action effect executing means, for example, when the set suggestion number of times shown in FIG. , which can be executed a plurality of times in a specific period after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, and restricts execution of the same mode in which the action rendering of the suggestive mode is included in the plurality of modes, for example, step 60AKS027 shown in FIG. 9-2. Limiting means such as the effect control CPU 120 that determines the setting suggestion pattern at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-6 in the process of . As a result, it is possible to diversify the presentation and improve the game interest.

The action effect execution means performs the action effect of the suggestion effect mode at a first timing such as the execution timing of the first suggestion, for example, and a second suggestion later than the first timing, for example, in a specific period after the elapse of the predetermined period. can be executed at the second timing such as the execution timing of, for example, as shown in FIGS. may be executed at a higher rate at the second timing than at the first timing. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the game interest so as to draw attention to the action effects of the suggestive effect mode.

The action effect executing means may be capable of executing, in a predetermined period of time, an action effect that announces control to be in an advantageous state in a suggestive effect mode. As a result, it is possible to diversify the performances so as to draw attention to the motion performances for giving advance notice, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Description of Characteristic Portions 91AK and 92AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12 regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10-1, various circuits such as a performance control microprocessor 91AK100, an input circuit 91AK121, a memory controller 91AK122, a performance data memory 91AK123, a ROM 91AK124, a RAM 91AK125, and a watchdog timer 91AK126 are mounted on the performance control board 12. ing. The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132, a voice processing circuit 91AK133, a lamp control circuit 91AK134, a motor control circuit 135, and a built-in memory 91AK136. The VDP 91AK132 includes an instruction decoder 91AK141, a demultiplexer 91AK142, a video decoder 91AK143, a moving image renderer 91AK144, a character image renderer 91AK145, a text image renderer 91AK146, a VRAM 91AK147, and a display drive circuit 91AK148. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 includes an audio decoder 91AK151.

The effect control microprocessor 91AK100 executes data processing and signal processing based on the effect control commands received from the main substrate 11, thereby controlling the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamps 9 and other decorations. It may be an integrated processor in which a circuit capable of controlling the execution of the production using some or all of the plurality of production devices, such as the LED for the display and the movable members for production such as the movable body 32, is integrated on one chip. . In addition, the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 includes a CPU 91AK131, a VDP 91AK132 and a built-in memory 91AK136. It may be provided outside the 91AK100.

The input circuit 91AK121 may include a buffer circuit or the like. The buffer circuit of the input circuit 91AK121 is used to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The memory controller 91AK122 executes various processes on the data stored in the performance data memory 91AK123 in accordance with the request signal supplied from the performance control microprocessor 91AK100. The effect data memory 91AK123 preliminarily stores effect data that can be used to execute effects using the effect device, such as various image data representing images displayed on the image display device 5, for example. The image data stored in the effect data memory 91AK123 may include moving image data and still image data. As the still image data, there is character image data, which is sprite image data, which is a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decoration patterns that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. It would be nice if it was prepared. The effect image corresponding to the decorative design may be included in the character image. In addition, an arbitrary character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, specifically, an effect image showing a person, a figure, a symbol, etc., and image data of a background image are stored in advance in the effect data memory 91AK123. It is good if there is. As still image data, for example, text image data that enables characters to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be prepared. In addition to the image data, the performance data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the audio data used for audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the lamp drive data used to drive the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and the decorative LEDs. The effect data memory 91AK123 may store part or all of the motor drive data used for rotationally driving the drive motor that operates the movable member such as the movable body 32 . The performance data memory 91AK123 may be a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as a NAND flash memory. However, when the performance data memory 91AK123 is used as a read-only storage device when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a state of normal use in which progress of performance is controlled.

ROM91AK124 memorize|stores a computer program, fixed data, etc. for production|presentation control. RAM91AK125 provides a work area to CPU91AK131 of microprocessor 91AK100 for production control. The watchdog timer 91AK126 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of an internal register, and when the measurement time passes the start time (timeout time) and timeout occurs, it becomes a time elapsing signal. generate a signal. The time-out signal is input to the CPU 91AK131 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100. Due to the generation of the time-out signal, the CPU 91AK131 enters a reset state and restarts the effect control microprocessor 91AK100.

The ROM 91AK 124 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the performance operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM91AK124, the CPU91AK131 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK100 comprises a plurality of determination tables prepared for various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting a determination table, and various performance control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer judgment value, end code, etc. It consists of process data. Part or all of the effect control pattern and effect control execution data may be configured as a display list. The display list is data of a command group describing a series of transfer commands to be executed by the VDP 91AK 132 according to the order of image processing. The display list may include a display control command group, a voice control command group, a lamp control command group, and a motor control command group in a mixed manner. By controlling the progress of the presentation using such a display list, it is sufficient to control the electrical components for presentation in cooperation with each other. The RAM 91AK 125 stores programs and various data used to control electrical parts for presentation. CPU91AK131 should just be able to read the program and data stored in RAM91AK125 in read-out time shorter than the read-out time of the program and data stored in ROM91AK124.

CPU91AK131 performs control processing according to the computer program for production|presentation control. At this time, the CPU 91AK131 executes an effect control process for controlling the progress of the effect by the effect electric parts according to the program read from the ROM 91AK124. The production control process includes, for example, a fixed data read process in which the CPU91AK131 reads out fixed data from the ROM91AK124, a variable data write process in which the CPU91AK131 writes various variable data to the RAM91AK125 and temporarily stores them, and various variation data read processing for reading variation data, reception processing for CPU 91AK 131 to accept input of various signals from the outside, transmission processing for CPU 91 AK 131 to output various signals to the outside, or part or all of these processing good too.

The VDP 91AK 132 determines the content of image display control in the image display device 5 based on display control commands from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. For example, the VDP 91AK 132 determines the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, thereby performing control for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays. The VDP91AK132 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, moving image data separation function, and video decoding function. The VDP 91AK132 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or an image processing microprocessor generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

The command decoder 91AK141 decodes the command portion (command code) included in the display control command from the CPU 91AK131 and instructs image processing or the like according to the decoding result. For example, a display control instruction group included in the decoded result is supplied to the internal circuit of the VDP91AK132. The instruction decoder 91AK141 may generate a control signal according to the decoding result and supply it to the internal circuit of the VDP 91AK132. The command group for voice control included in the decoding result may be supplied to the voice processing circuit 91AK133. The instruction group for lamp control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the lamp control circuit 91AK134. The instruction group for motor control included in the decoded result may be supplied to the motor control circuit 91AK135.

The demultiplexer 91AK142 receives moving image data read from the performance data memory 91AK123 or the like, separates the data into video data and audio data, and outputs the data. The video data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the video decoder 91AK143. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and outputs it. The video data output from the video decoder 91AK143 is supplied to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The video decoder 91AK143 may read compression-encoded character image data or text image data from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like, decompress and decode it, and then supply it to the character image renderer 91AK145 or text image renderer 91AK146.

The moving image renderer 91AK144 writes and stores the video data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143 in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes image processing capable of adjusting the hue, saturation, and brightness of the image shown in the image data, or a part or all of these, and temporarily stores the adjusted image data in the VRAM 91AK147. may The character image renderer 91AK145 receives character image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and character image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores the data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may convert the character image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The character image renderer 91AK145 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the character image designated by the character image designation information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the character display setting information. good. The text image renderer 91AK146 receives text image data read from the effect data memory 91AK123 or the like and text image data supplied from the video decoder 91AK143, and writes and stores them in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may convert the text image data in vector format into bitmap format and temporarily store it in the VRAM 91AK147. The text image renderer 91AK146 may perform image conversion processing for displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. good.

The VRAM 91AK 147 temporarily stores image data and provides a work area for image data processing by the VDP 91AK 132 . The VRAM 91AK 147 may be provided with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data is stored, a text buffer in which text image data is stored, and a CG buffer. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data that defines the display colors of characters and text when drawing processing is executed by the VDP91AK132, and temporarily stores display data for effect images created by drawing processing. used for storage. The display drive circuit 91AK148 is a circuit for outputting a signal for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5 . The display drive circuit 91AK148 outputs a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) and scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5 along with a color signal (grayscale control signal) corresponding to the display data created in the VDP 91AK132. do it.

A frame buffer may be provided within VRAM 91AK147 or in a memory module separate from VRAM 91AK147, such as internal memory 91AK136. The frame buffer provides a virtual display area in which display data of effect images created by drawing processing by the VDP 91AK132 is expanded and stored. The display data stored in the frame buffer is bitmap format image data (pixel data, raster data). The frame buffer stores, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the frame buffer, and the display data for the virtual display area is supplied to the display drive circuit 91AK148. Thus, the image may be output to the image display device 5 side.

For example, an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated to the storage area of the frame buffer. Display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored in the image display area. The image drawing area stores the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V-blank occurs. A V-blank occurs at a period when the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time V-blank is started, a V-blank interrupt signal may be output from VDP 91AK132 to CPU 91AK131, and various interrupt signals may be output from VDP 91AK132 to CPU 91AK131. By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V-blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image-drawing area in a certain V-blank cycle (first drawing display period). At the same time that the drawing process is performed, this storage area is switched to the image display area in the next V blank period (second drawing display period). Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period. In the storage area, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

The audio processing circuit 91AK133 generates audio signals that enable audio output using the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132. The audio data output from the demultiplexer 91AK142 of the VDP 91AK132 is supplied to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The audio decoder 91AK151 decompresses and decodes compression-encoded audio data to generate an audio signal. Also, the audio processing circuit 91AK133 may include an audio data memory capable of pre-storing audio data that is not included in moving image data. The audio data memory may be provided outside the audio processing circuit 91AK133 by being included in the effect data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124, or the like, for example. The audio processing circuit 91AK133 may generate an audio signal by decompressing and decoding audio data read from the audio data memory based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132.

The lamp control circuit 91AK134 controls lighting modes (light-emitting modes) such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. The lamp control circuit 91AK134 generates lamp control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 91AK132, and outputs the data to the lamp control board 14 and the lamp driver board. The motor control circuit 91AK135 controls operating states such as rotation, stop, rotation speed, rotation angle (phase), etc. for the drive motor that operably drives the performance movable member such as the movable body 32 . The motor control circuit 91AK135 generates motor control data based on commands and register settings from the CPU 91AK131 and VDP 132, and outputs the data to the motor driver board. The built-in memory 91AK136 is a memory circuit built in the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, and can store various data used to control the progress of the effect.

FIG. 10-2 shows a configuration example corresponding to the storage contents for the storage area for effect control. In this embodiment, storage areas 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 are provided as a plurality of storage areas. Each storage area may be provided so as to be included in, for example, the effect data memory 91AK123, ROM91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136, or part or all of these. The plurality of storage areas include a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data relating to moving images and a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data relating to text images.

The storage area 91AKM01 stores a performance control program and performance control management data, and functions as a management area such as a program for performance control. For example, the CPU 91AK 131 of the production control microprocessor 91AK 100 performs various judgments, decisions, and settings. Table data, which are configuration data of various tables, pattern data constituting production control patterns, etc., are stored in a storage area as management data. It may be stored in 91AKM01.

The storage area 91AKM02 stores a display control program and display control management data, and functions as a display control program management area. For example, an image processing program prepared for the VDP 91AK 132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK 100 to perform various image processing, a display process table defining the procedure for displaying effect images, etc. are stored in the storage area 91AKM02. It is good if there is The image processing program may include a program for converting vector format image data into bitmap format image data. The image processing program may include a program for generating a bitmap-format text image based on text described using character codes and font data.

Storage area 91AKM11 stores moving image related data including moving image data and related data. For moving image data, image compression information including reference images and predicted images is generated by compression encoding such as motion-compensated predictive encoding using images of multiple frames that serve as original images, and multiplexed with audio data. Any multiplexed encoded stream may be used. The moving image related data stored in the storage area 91AKM11 may include table data and data files forming a moving image display process table. The moving image display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of moving images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Used. The display content of the moving image is the content of the moving image reproduced and displayed corresponding to the moving image data. The display mode of the moving image is the mode and form of reproducing and displaying the moving image, including the display style and display layout of the moving image. Table data and data files that constitute the moving image display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM12 stores character image related data including character image data and its related data. The character image data may be static image data in which any character image representing a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns, persons, graphics, symbols, etc. is described in vector or bitmap format. The character image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM12 may include table data and data files forming a character display process table. The character display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display contents and display mode of the character image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the character image is the content of the character image displayed corresponding to the character image data. The display mode of the character image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the character image. Note that table data and data files forming the character display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM13 stores text image data and text image related data including related data. The text image related data may include outline font data. Outline font data is data that can be converted to the character shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying a combination of multiple vertex coordinates that connect the outline for each character used to display the text image. be. The text image related data may include vector font data or stroke font data instead of or in addition to outline font data. Vector font data and stroke font data are data that can be converted into the shape of each character in bitmap format image data by specifying parameters for straight lines and curves for each character used to display a text image. . Outline fonts and vector fonts are included in scalable fonts whose quality does not easily deteriorate even when the font is enlarged or reduced. The text image data indicates a text image that constitutes a character string combining a plurality of character images, and arbitrarily set words such as sentences, paragraphs, sentences, phrases, words, or a combination of some or all of these. Any unit can be used as long as the unit is recognizable. Also, the text image data may indicate a text image with only a single character image. The text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 using the text image data may indicate telop characters, subtitles, other information transmission characters, and so on. It may indicate a decorative character. Since the text image data is included in the effect data for displaying the text image, it may be stored in the effect data memory 91AK123. On the other hand, font data such as outline font data is used when VDP 91AK 132 executes the image processing program, so it may be stored in either ROM 91AK 124 or built-in memory 91AK 136 . Thus, the storage area 91AKM13 may be provided in the performance data memory 91AK123, the ROM 91AK124 or the internal memory 91AK136. Similarly, other storage areas may be provided in part or all of a plurality of memory devices such as effect data memory 91AK123, ROM 91AKM124, built-in memory 91AK136.

The text image-related data stored in storage area 91AKM13 may include table data and data files that constitute a text display process table. The text display process table is used for display control processing that can change the display content and display mode of the text image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. be done. The display content of the text image is the content of the text image displayed corresponding to the text image data. The display mode of the text image is the mode or form in which the character image is displayed, including the display style and display layout of the text image. The table data and data files forming the text display process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM02 as display control management data.

Storage area 91AKM14 stores audio related data including audio data and related data. The sound data stored in the storage area 91AKM14 is different from the sound reproduced and output in synchronization with the image in the presentation by moving image display, and can reproduce and output any sound as the presentation in the pachinko game machine 1 progresses. Anything that does. The audio-related data stored in storage area 91AKM14 may include table data and data files that constitute an audio output process table. The sound output process table is used for sound control processing that can change sounds such as sound effects and music output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the progress of the performance in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the elapsed time. Table data and data files that constitute the voice output process table may be stored in the storage area 91AKM01 as effect control management data.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the moving image data read from the storage area 91AKM11 is input to the demultiplexer 91AK142 and separated into video data and audio data. The video data is input to the video decoder 91AK143, and the audio data is input to the audio decoder 91AK151 of the audio processing circuit 91AK133. The video decoder 91AK143 decompresses and decodes the compression-encoded video data and supplies it to the moving image renderer 91AK144. The moving image renderer 91AK144 executes conversion processing of video data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the moving image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. In this way, the display of the moving image is controlled using the moving image data stored in the storage area 91AKM11.

In the VDP 91AK132 of the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, the text image data read from the storage area 91AKM13 is input to the text image renderer 91AK146. If the text image data is compression-encoded, it may be decompressed and decoded by the video decoder 91AK143 before being input to the text image renderer 91AK146. The text image renderer 91AK146 executes conversion processing of the text image data according to the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image, for example, and writes and stores the converted data in a predetermined area of the VRAM 91AK147. Thus, the display of the text image is controlled using the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13.

FIG. 10-3 shows an example of determination of moving image data and a text display process table according to contents of ready-to-win effects. In super reach effects such as SP reach A and SP reach B, effects by moving image display using moving image data and effects by text image display using text image data can be executed. The period during which the dynamic image display effect is executed and the period during which the text image display effect is executed may be partially or wholly the same period, or may include different periods. The text display process table is a table in which process data used for display control is set, for example, when displaying a text image in which a plurality of character images are combined.

In the determination example shown in FIG. 10-3, one of the moving image data 91AKD01, 91AKD02, 91AKD11, and 91AKD12 is determined, and one of the text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, 91AKT11, and 91AKT12 is determined according to the content of the ready-to-win effect. be done. Among them, the moving image data is determined in one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach-to-win A (big win)", moving image data 91AKD01 is determined. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the moving image data 91AKD02 is determined. When the content of ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (losing)", moving image data 91AKD11 is determined. When the contents of ready-to-win effect are "SP ready-to-win B (losing)", moving image data 91AKD12 is determined. On the other hand, the text display process table may or may not be determined in common for different ready-to-win effect contents. For example, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 30/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 70/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 20/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 80/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach A (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 80/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 20/100. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT11 is 70/100, and the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT12 is 30/100.

The text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or "SP reach A (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach B (losing)", it is impossible to decide. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 can be determined when the reach effect content is "SP reach B (big hit)" or "SP reach B (loss)", and the reach effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)" or In the case of "SP reach A (losing)", it is impossible to decide. Thus, the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 are used to control the display of the text image when the SP reach A reach effect is executed. The text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 are used to control the display of text images when the SP reach B reach effect is executed.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the effect is executed by moving image display using moving image data 91AKD01, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image using either the text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is added to the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image displayed using the moving image data 91AKD11. Displayable. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win B (big win)", a moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD02 is executed, and when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach-to-win B (losing)", a moving image is displayed. An effect by moving image display using data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image using either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is added to a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD02 and a moving image displayed using moving image data 91AKD12. Displayable. Therefore, it is possible to add and display a text image using a common text display process table to a plurality of moving images displayed using different moving image data.

FIG. 10-4 shows a configuration example of the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 10-4 (A1) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT01 that can be used in correspondence with the reach effect of SP reach A, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT02 that can be used corresponding to the effect. FIG. 10-4(B) shows a configuration example of a text display process table 91AKT11 that can be used corresponding to SP reach B reach effect.

In each text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Note that the text display process table may include one in which text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a single text display period. The text display period designates the start time to start displaying and the end time to end the display for each text image to be displayed. The start time and end time of the text display period may be specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image in the reach effect, or specified using the elapsed time from the start of the variable display. may However, if the display content of the text image is highly related to the display content of the moving image, the start time and end time of the text display period will be calculated using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image. should be specified. Since the elapsed time after the start of the variable display includes, for example, the elapsed time before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the variable display effect before the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, etc., can be used even in the common ready-to-reach effect. may start to appear at different times. Even in such a case, if the start time and end time of the text display period are specified using the elapsed time from the start of the display of the moving image, the timing at which the specific image in the moving image is displayed, The timing at which a specific text image is displayed can be easily synchronized, and the linkage between the display of the moving image and the display of the text image can be enhanced. The text image designation information designates the text image data used for displaying the text image so as to be identifiable. For example, the text image designation information may be information that designates the storage address, readout address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13. Alternatively, the text image specification information uses arbitrary character codes such as ASCII code, UNICODE (UTF-16 or UTF-8, etc.), and JIS code (Shift_JIS code, etc.) to specify the content of the text image to be displayed. may be information specifying the The text display setting information is information that designates the display mode of the text image to be settable based on display style information, display layout information, and other metadata of the text image to be displayed. The text display process table may be described using a predetermined markup language such as TTML (Timed Text Markup Language). In addition, the text display process table may be set by using arbitrary table data so that the text image designation information and the text display setting information can be set in association with each other during the text display period.

FIG. 10-5 shows an example of text image display control using the text display process table. Of these, FIG. 10-5(A1) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, and FIG. 10-5(A2) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02. . FIG. 10-5(B) shows an example of display control in the case of the text display process table 91AKT11. In these display control examples, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the display of the moving image is started at timing T00, and when the SP reach B reach effect is executed, at timing T10. The display of moving images is started at a certain time.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4(A1), as shown in FIG. 10-5(A1), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. In the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T02 to T04 are all included in the period from timing T01 to timing T05. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA04 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Note that the timing T08 is a timing that comes after the timing T07.

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4(A2), as shown in FIG. 10-5(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designation information 91AKA01 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. is displayed. After the timing T05 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA14 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T06 to the timing T08, and the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed during the text display period from the timing T07 to the timing T09. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

In this manner, the text image designated by the text image designation information can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in correspondence with a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table. The first text display period included in the plurality of text display periods may include a second text display period different from the first text display period and a period partially or wholly common to the second text display period. For example, in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, and the second text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. It is set to include 3 text display periods. In this case, part of the first text display period is shared with the second text display period, and part of the other period is shared with the third text display period. Thus, the first text display period includes a period partially common to the second text display period, and includes a period partially common to the third text display period. On the other hand, the entire period of the second text display period is in common with the first text display period, and the entire period of the third text display period is in common with the first text display period. Thus, the second text display period is entirely included in the first text display period, and the third text display period is entirely included in the first text display period. Further, the text display period from timing T06 to timing T08 and the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09 include periods that are partially common to each other. Thus, the first text display period may be partially included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be partially included in the first text display period. Alternatively, the first text display period may be entirely included in the second text display period, and the second text display period may be entirely included in the first text display period.

By setting in the text display process table, different text images designated by the text image designation information can be displayed according to a plurality of text display periods. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the first component related to the display content of the text image among the plurality of components in the display of the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05 by setting in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, as a third text display period included in the first text display period, the text image designation information 91AKA03 or the text A text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed during the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. . On the other hand, of the first text display period, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed. The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the second text image specified by the information 91AKA02 is added. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the first text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed with the text image designation information The display of the text image is changed so that the display of the third text image designated by 91AKA03 or the display of the fourth text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is added. In this case, the display of the text image added to the display of the first text image is set so that either the third text image or the fourth text image is displayed according to the determination result of the text display process table. It becomes possible to change.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the common text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, and the text from timing T02 to timing T03 is displayed. The text image designated by the common text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed during the display period. On the other hand, in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, in the case of the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed, and in the case of the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image is displayed. The text image designated by the image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed. The text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02 can be determined corresponding to common moving image data 91AKD01 and 91AKD11. Therefore, even when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text images to be displayed are different in at least a part of a plurality of text display periods. Components can be changed. It should be noted that when a moving image using common moving image data is displayed, the text image as the display mode may be changed in all of the plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. good. When moving images using common moving image data are displayed, part or all of the start time, end time, and period length may be different for a plurality of text display periods according to the determination result of the text display process table. You can let In this way, part or all of the display period for displaying the text image added to one moving image may be changed, or part or all of the text image added to one moving image may be changed. may be

In the case of the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B), as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15, the text image designation information 91AKA21 causes the text image specified by to be displayed. Also, during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed, and during the text display period from timing T13 to timing T14, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA23 is displayed. is displayed. Timings T12 to T14 are all included in the period from timing T11 to timing T15. After the timing T15 has passed, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA24 is displayed during the text display period from timing T16 to timing T17, and the text image designation information 91AKA25 is displayed during the text display period from timing T18 to timing T19. causes the text image specified by to be displayed.

FIG. 10-6 shows a specific example of text display setting information. The text display setting information includes data corresponding to multiple fields such as origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration. The origin field can set the origin coordinates when displaying a text image. The fontFamily field can set the font family, which is the font type, for the font of the characters included in the text image. The fontSize field can set the font size that is the size for displaying the text image. The fontWeight field can set the thickness of characters included in the text image. The color field can set the display color of characters included in the text image. The backgroundColor field can set the display color of the background in the text image. The fontStyle field allows you to set the style of the characters in the text image, such as normal, italic, or italic. The textAlign field can set the alignment of characters included in the text image, such as right alignment, center alignment, and left alignment. The textDecoration field can set decorations to be added to the text image, such as underline, overline, strikethrough, and other effect images. In this way, the text display setting information makes it possible to set the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB01. FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB02. FIG. 10-6 (C1) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB03. FIG. 10-6 (C2) shows a configuration example of the text display setting information 91AKB13. Text display setting information 91AKB01 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB02 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01, 91AKT02, and 91AKT11. Text display setting information 91AKB03 is included in text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11, but not included in text display process table 91AKT02. The text display setting information 91AKB13 is included in the text display process table 91AKT02, but not included in the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT11.

In a plurality of text display periods set by the text display process table, the text image designated by the text image designation information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. can be displayed. Thereby, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, it is possible to change the second component related to the display mode of the text image among the plurality of components in displaying the text image according to the elapsed time. become. For example, according to the settings in the text display process table 91AKT01 and the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. displayed in the specified display style and display layout. As the second text display period included in the first text display period, in the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Displayed in a display style or display layout. After the second text display period ends at timing T03, the third text display period included in the first text display period is designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 in the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. and the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display style set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. or display layout. With this setting, only the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as text in the period from timing T01 to timing T02 and the period from timing T03 to timing T04 in the first text display period. It is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the setting information 91AKB01. On the other hand, during the period from timing T02 to timing T03, which is common to the second text display period, in the first text display period, the text image is added to the display of the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01. The display of the text image is changed so that the text image designated by the designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. On the other hand, during the period from timing T04 to timing T05 common to the third text display period in the first text display period, the text image designation is added to the display of the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. When the text image designated by the information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, and when the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The display of the text image is changed so that it may be displayed in the specified display style or display layout.

In the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB02, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It can be displayed in the display style and display layout set by . In the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the text display setting information 91AKB03, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by . Alternatively, in the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the text display setting information, unlike the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. It may be displayed in the display style or display layout set by the information 91AKB13. In this way, during the period common to the second text display period from timing T02 to timing T03 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed as the first text display period. 1 display mode, and the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 can be displayed in a second display mode different from the first display mode. Of the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA01 is displayed in the first display mode. Along with the display, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 may be displayed in a third display mode different from the first display mode and the second display mode. Alternatively, during the period common to the third text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 in the first text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 is first displayed. In addition, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 may be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the first to third display modes. Therefore, during the display period of the text image added to the moving image, some of the text images can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the other text images. Further, after displaying the text image in the second display mode together with the text image in the first display mode, the text image in the second display mode is changed to the text image in the third display mode, and the second display mode is displayed. The display mode of the text image can be changed and displayed so that the text image of the mode may be changed to the text image of the fourth display mode.

In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, the text image The text image designated by the designation information 91AKA01 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. Also, during the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02. Thereby, a common text image can be displayed in a common display mode. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. display. In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13 corresponding to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. This allows different text images to be displayed in different display modes. On the other hand, in the text display process table 91AKT11, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. display. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponding to the text display period from timing T11 to timing T12. In this case, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA21 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01. Also, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA22 can be displayed in a common display mode with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02. In this manner, even different text images added to different moving images may be displayed in a common display mode according to setting data based on common text display setting information. Alternatively, in the text display process table 91AKT01, the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB05 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. Let In the text display process table 91AKT02, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA05 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB15 corresponding to the text display period from timing T07 to timing T09. In this manner, even a common text image may be displayed in different display modes according to the text display setting information.

In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. Further, in a plurality of text display process tables, at least part of the text image designation information and text display setting information set in association with a plurality of text display periods can be set as common information, and , part or all of the information can be set as different information. With these settings, the first component and the second component related to the text image, such as the display content and display mode of the text image, can be individually changed and displayed.

In the text display setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 10-6(A), the color field is set so that the display color of the text image changes stepwise from #FF0040 to #4000FF. In the text display process table 91AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4(A1) and the text display process table 91AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4(A2), during the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05, text display A text image is displayed in the display mode set by the setting information 91AKB01. In the text display process table 91AKT11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the text image is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 during the text display period from timing T11 to timing T15. In these cases, when the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 is displayed as a text image corresponding to the display content that is the common first component in the corresponding text display period, The display mode, which is the second component of the text image, such as the display color of the text image, can be changed according to the elapsed time. Note that the display color of the text image set by the color field, for example, may be changeable according to the contents of the ready-to-win effect, etc., even when the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. . In this case, whether or not the display color of the text image is changed at a different rate depending on whether or not the control is in an advantageous state, such as whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "big hit". It may be determined, or one of a plurality of display colors may be determined. Further, for example, the display color of the text image set by the color field is changed according to the execution result of the effect control program by the CPU 91AK 131 even if the same text image is specified by the text image specification information. It may be possible. In this case, the VDP 91AK 132 should be able to change the display color of the text image set by the color field to a different display color based on the display control command from the CPU 91AK 131, register settings, and the like. In this way, the display mode such as the display style of the text image can be changed only by changing a part of the data related to the text image contained in the text display process table. , it is possible to display various text images. When changing the display color of the text image, other display styles may also be changeable accordingly. For example, when the display color of the text image is white, the display of the text image becomes easy for the player to visually recognize, and when the display color of the text image is red, the display of the text image becomes difficult for the player to recognize. Tend. Therefore, when the display color of the text image is changed to red, the text image set by the fontSize field, for example, is displayed so that the font size is larger than when the display color of the text image is white. The size may be changed. As a specific example, a text image displayed with a font size of 10.5px when the display color is white will be displayed with a font size of 11px when the display color is changed to red. It would be nice if it could be changed to As a result, it is possible to display a text image that is easy for the player to visually recognize while suppressing the player's sense of discomfort in displaying the text image.

FIG. 10-7 shows an execution example of rendering in which a text image is displayed using the text display process table. In this execution example, text images corresponding to a plurality of text display periods are displayed along with the moving image display when the reach performance of SP reach A is executed. In the reach performance of the SP reach A, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", a moving image is displayed using the moving image data 91AKD01, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", a moving image is displayed. Moving image display using data 91AKD11 is performed. In the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD01 and the moving image display using the moving image data 91AKD11, a common effect display is performed in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight against each other. It is sufficient that the content of the effect display is common until the timing of notification. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big win", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is high, and when the display result of the variable display is "losing", the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is increased. becomes higher. Therefore, in the ready-to-win performance of the SP reach-A, even during the moving image display period in which the contents of the common performance display are displayed, the degree of expectation for the big win can be varied according to the display contents of the text image according to the text display process table. can be done.

Effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 10-7(A) is effect content common to text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, and text image designation information 91AKA01 is displayed corresponding to the text display period from timing T01 to timing T05. is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. In this case, the text image indicating the reach name "SP reach A" designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01 has, for example, origin coordinates of (300, 30), The font family is AA_gothic, which is classified as a gothic typeface, the font size is 48px, the bold line width corresponds to the bold character thickness, and the display color of the text image gradually changes from #FF0040 to #4000FF. The components in the display of the text image are controlled so that the background display color is #CCF0F0, the character style is italic or italic corresponding to italic, the character placement is centered, and the character decoration is not set. In the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, if the text image renderer 91AK146 of the VDP 91AK132 executes image conversion processing for displaying the text image in a display mode including the display style and display layout specified by the text display specification information. good.

In the effect execution example 91AKD11 shown in FIG. 10-7(A), the text image specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 corresponds to the text display period from the timing T02 to the timing T03. It is displayed in the display mode set by In this case, the text image indicating the line "If this character wins..." specified by the text image specification information 91AKA02 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB02, for example, with origin coordinates of (250, 600 ), the font family is BB_mincho, which is classified as a Mincho typeface, the font size is 36px, the normal line width corresponding to the normal character thickness, the display color of the text image is #FFFFFF, and the background display color is #220C0C. , normal typeface corresponding to normal for the character style, left-aligned character alignment, and no character decoration.

Effect execution example 91AKD21 shown in FIG. 10-7(B1) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT02 when text display process table 91AKT01 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA03 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03. In this case, the text image indicating the line "chance!!" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA03 is displayed as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB03, for example, the origin coordinates are (250,600) and the font family is CC_gothic typeface classified as Gothic, font size 60px, normal line width corresponding to normal character thickness, text image display color #000000, background display color #FFFFFF, character style normal The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the corresponding normal typeface, character placement is centered, and character decoration is not set. This text image has the same origin coordinates and character decoration as the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA02, and has the same font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, and background display. Colors, character styles, and character alignment have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, it may be possible to change and display some of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. .

Effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 10-7 (B2) includes effect contents different from text display process table 91AKT01 when text display process table 91AKT02 is used, and during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05 Correspondingly, the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA13 is displayed in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. In this case, the text image indicating the line "Gekiatsu" specified by the text image specification information 91AKA13 has, for example, the origin coordinates of (250,600) and the font family of DD_mincho as the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB13. The font size is 72px, the bold line width corresponds to bold, the display color of the text image is gold corresponding to "gold", the background display color is #000000, The constituent elements in the text image are controlled so that the character style is normal body corresponding to normal, the character placement is in the center, and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display by effect_gold. Compared with the text image specified by the text image specifying information 91AKA02, this text image has only the origin coordinates in common, and has font family, font size, character thickness, text image display color, background display color, Character styles, character alignments, and character decorations have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, the data to be changed and the data not to be changed among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information are individually set. It may be possible. When this text image is compared with the text image designated by the text image designation information 91AKA01, all settings including the origin coordinates have been changed. In this way, when displaying the text image specified by the text image specifying information, it may be possible to change and display all of the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information. When displaying the text image specified by the text image specification information, among the data corresponding to the plurality of fields included in the text display setting information, if one data is changed and displayed, the first data and the Other pre-associated data may also be changeable and displayable. For example, if the display color of the text image is changed to gold corresponding to "gold", the character decoration should be changed to the effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold.

The display color of the text image and the background display color are, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), luminance (gradation) of any one of "0" to "255". The level can be set in 256 stages. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field have the same data format as the field data forming the color field and the backgroundColor field in the character display setting information used for displaying character images, for example. It is good if there is The coordinates of the origin for displaying the text image can be set by combining the x-coordinate in the horizontal direction and the y-coordinate in the vertical direction on the screen of the image display device 5 . In the text display setting information, the field data forming the origin field may have a data format common to that of the field data forming the origin field in the character display setting information, for example. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is common to the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. may have a format. With such text display setting information, it is sufficient if the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, can be changed using common information with the effect image that is different from the text image. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of changing the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image.

A font family that can be set when displaying a text image is not set when displaying a character image. In the text display setting information, the field data forming the fontFamily field may be unique field data not included in the character display setting information. Also, instead of the font size that can be set when displaying a text image, it is sufficient if the character size can be set when displaying a character image. The field data forming the fontSize field in the text display setting information corresponds to the field data forming the characterSize field in the character display setting information, but may have a unique field format. In this way, some or all of the field data included in the text display setting information is unique and different from the field data included in the setting information used to display the effect image different from the text image, such as the character display setting information. It may have a data format. With such text display setting information, it is possible to change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, using unique information that is not used in the effect image that is different from the text image. good too. This makes it possible to flexibly change the second component related to the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, and display various text images.

For example, when gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image, the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display by effect_gold. In the text display setting information, when "gold" is set in the color field, by setting effect_gold in the textDecoration field, a glossy text image is displayed and gold is displayed around the text image. It is possible to add and display an effect image for In the effect execution example 91AKD22 shown in FIG. 10-7(B2), when the text image designation information 91A13 designates a specific text image showing the line "Super Hot", the text display setting information 91AKB13 is used for gold display. By setting the display style, etc., the specific text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed with glossiness, and the effect image for gold display is displayed around the specific text image. . This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when an effect by moving image display using moving image data is executed, by adding an effect by text image display using text image data, the player can easily recognize the contents of the effect. This makes it easy to provide information that is different from the contents of the presentation. In this case, in a data structure in which text image data is compression-encoded and multiplexed as video data included in moving image data, in text image display using text image data reproduced by decompression and decoding, contours There is a possibility that problems such as blurring and deterioration of display quality may occur. In addition, if different moving image data are prepared according to the display contents of the text image display added to the moving image display, the data volume of the moving image data tends to increase, and the image data processing load also increases. easier. If a special compression encoding process or decompression decoding process is executed in order to prevent the display quality from deteriorating in text image display, the image data processing load may increase further.

In the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK, when an effect by moving image display using the moving image data read out from the storage area 91AKM11 is executed, an effect by text image display using the text image data read out from the storage area 91AKM13 is added. By doing so, various text image displays can be easily executed with high quality, and the player can easily recognize the contents of the presentation. In addition, since text image display effects using text image data stored separately from moving image data are added, an increase in the data volume of moving image data and an increase in the processing load of image data are avoided. , it is possible to control the appropriate display that can be prevented as much as possible.

A text image display added to a moving image display using moving image data is controlled using a text display process table. Similarly, moving image display is controlled using a moving image display process table, character image display is controlled using a character display process table, and audio output is controlled using audio output process data. In the text display process table, text image designation information and text display setting information are set in association with a plurality of text display periods. The text image designation information designates the display content of the text image corresponding to the text image data as the first component related to the text image. The text display setting information sets the display mode of the text image, such as the display style and display layout of the text image, as a second component related to the text image. In the VDP 91AK 132 of the performance control microprocessor 91AK 100, for example, the text image renderer 91AK 146 displays the text image specified by the text image specification information in a display mode including the display style and display layout set by the text display setting information. It is possible to execute image conversion processing for the purpose. As a result, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image as the first component and the display mode of the text image as the second component can be changed according to the elapsed time. Make it changeable. By making it possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image added to one moving image, it is possible to display various text images easily and with high quality, and at the same time reduce data capacity and processing load. Appropriate display control is enabled so that growth is prevented.

When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", either text display process table 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using moving image data 91AKD01 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. When the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (losing)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD11 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. Further, when the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP ready-to-win B (big hit)", either of the text display process tables 91AKT11 and 91AKT12 is executed when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD02 is executed. The used text image can be added and displayed. When the content of the ready-to-win effect is "SP reach B (losing)", either text display process table 91AKT11 or 91AKT12 is used when the moving image display effect using the moving image data 91AKD12 is executed. A text image can be added and displayed. In this way, it is possible to add and display a text image using data relating to a common text image, such as a common text display process table, for a plurality of moving images that are different from each other. By adding text images using common data to multiple moving images and displaying them, various text images can be displayed easily and with high quality, while preventing increases in data volume and processing load. Appropriate display control becomes possible.

In the text display process table 91AKT02, a plurality of text images showing the words "hot" are displayed according to the text image specification information 91AKA13 and the text display setting information 91AKB13 set in association with the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05. The display style or the like may be displayed so as to be changeable at the timing of . The text image showing the line "Super hot" is a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image that is a display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is likely to be a "big hit". Any text image is acceptable. Thus, when displaying a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group, the second component such as the display mode of the specific text image may be changed at multiple timings.

FIG. 10-8 shows an example of display control when the display style of a text image showing the words "hot" can be changed at a plurality of timings. In this display control example, of the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the display color is black and the character decoration is not set during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041, and the text from timing T041 to timing T042 is displayed in black. During the display period, the display color is gold and character decoration is not set, and in the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05, the display color is gold and the character decoration is effect display setting for gold display. As for the display style of the text image that is common to the text display period from timing T04 to timing T05, the font family is DD_mincho in the fontFamily field and the font size is 72px in the fontSize field. is set.

FIG. 10-8(A) shows a case where a text image of the line "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T04 to timing T041. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to black corresponding to #000000, and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the text image showing the line "Super hot" is displayed in black and the character decoration is not set.

FIG. 10-8(B) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T041 to timing T042. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the character decoration to no setting corresponding to none. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled so that the display color of the text image showing the words "hot" is gold and the character decoration is not set. When the display color of the text image is set to gold, it is possible to display the text image with glossiness by, for example, gradation display of the text image. However, if the display of the text image is only glossy, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the gold display.

FIG. 10-8(C) shows a case in which a text image with the words "Gekiatsu" is displayed during the text display period from timing T042 to timing T05. As the display style of the text image during this text display period, the color field sets the display color of the text image to gold corresponding to "gold", and the textDecoration field sets the effect display setting for gold display corresponding to the text decoration effect_gold. be done. As a result, the display mode including the display style is controlled such that the display color of the text image showing the line "Super hot" is gold and the character decoration is effect display settings for gold display. In addition to setting the display color of the text image to gold, if the character decoration of the text image is set to the effect display setting for gold display, in addition to the gradation display of the text image, for example, the border of the text image It is possible to display an effect image around the text image by using the display color of , shading, border display by beveling or embossing, a layer style that adds glow, or a combination of some or all of these. As a result, in addition to the display of the text image having glossiness, the effect image is added around the text image and displayed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the gold display, thereby improving the game performance with respect to the display of the text image. It can improve the impression of people.

In the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02, a part of the text image is separated from the other part by the text image specification information 91AKA02 and the text display setting information 91AKB02 set in association with the text display period from timing T02 to timing T03. It may be displayed in a different display style. The text image designation information 91AKA02 designates a text image of the line "If this character wins...". The text display setting information 91AKB02 sets a part of the text image "character" out of the text information indicating the line "if this character wins..." to a different display color and background display of the text image from the other parts. All you have to do is set the color and character style.

FIG. 10-9 shows a display example in which a portion of the text image is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions. In this display example, part of the text image "character" is displayed in white, the background color is black, and the character style is italic, while the other part of the text image is displayed in black. It is displayed so that the background display color is white and the character style is normal. The text display setting information 91AKB02 corresponds to a part of the text image "character". Set the italic corresponding to the character style italic by the fontStyle field respectively. Also, the text display setting information 91AKB02 has black corresponding to #000000 as the display color of the text image by the color field, white corresponding to #FFFFFF as the background display color, and white corresponding to #FFFFFF by the fontStyle field. Set the normal type corresponding to the character style normal, respectively. Thus, by displaying a portion of the text image in a display style different from that of the other portions, the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

In the display of a text image that constitutes a character string in which a plurality of character images are combined, a portion displayed in a display style different from that of other portions may be changeable according to the progress of presentation by moving image display. For example, when a piece of music or dialogue is played back along with a moving image, a portion of the text image corresponding to the progress is displayed in a display style different from that of the other portions, such as a specific color display or highlight display. You may let It may be possible to change the display style so that a part of the text image is faded-in or faded-out according to the progress of the music performance or speech reproduction. A portion of the text image displayed in a display style different from that of other portions is changed according to the elapsed time during the execution of an arbitrary effect, not limited to situations in which the music is played or the voice of dialogue is played along with the moving image display. It may be possible. As a result, in the display of the text image, a part displayed in a display style different from that of the other parts is changed in accordance with the progress of the performance, so that the player's impression of the display of the text image can be enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, It may be provided with a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, during the display period of the text image added to one moving image, the display content of the text image that is the first component and the display mode of the text image that is the second component are set to the elapsed time, etc. Execute one of the following: display control to enable change according to the situation, or display control to enable display by adding a text image using data related to a common text image to a plurality of moving images. It may be one that does not execute the other. The first component and the second component related to the text image may be able to change arbitrary components, for example, regarding the display content and display mode of the text image. Instead of part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, or in addition to part or all of the display content and display mode of the text image, any component related to the display of the text image can be changed. may For example, the time interval and movement width for updating the display position when moving and displaying a text image, the enlargement ratio and reduction ratio when displaying an enlarged or reduced text image, these enlargement ratios and reduction ratios depending on the elapsed time It is only necessary to be able to change arbitrary components that can be set for the display of the text image, such as the time interval for updating the enlargement ratio or the reduction ratio and the amount of change when the text image is changed.

When displaying a text image corresponding to the common display content, the display mode of the text image is changed by changing the text image setting information 91AKB01 shown in FIG. 10-6(A). It is not limited to changing the display color, and any display mode such as display style or display layout may be changed. For example, the text image of the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01 can be displayed in the corresponding text display period instead of the display color of the text image, or in addition to the display color of the text image. Any display mode such as font size, character thickness, background display color, character style, character arrangement, decorative display, or a combination of some or all of these may be changed. The text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information different from the text display setting information 91AKB01 may be changeable to a display mode different from the display mode of the text image in the display mode set by the text display setting information 91AKB01. .

The text image data is not limited to the data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 as data different from the moving image data, and at least a part of the text image data may be included in the moving image data. For example, text image data for displaying highly designed characters, such as cursive or cursive, is multiplexed or compression-encoded as part of video data, and the video data separated from this video data is decompressed. It may be possible to display the text image in a particular manner, such as by decoding. In this case, the data regarding the text image of the specific mode is included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11. In this way, the text image related data includes the specific text image related data included in the moving image data and stored in storage area 91AKM11, and the normal text image related data stored in storage area 91AKM13. may

The text display setting information included in the text display process table consists of field data corresponding to part of origin, fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, color, backgroundColor, fontStyle, textAlign, and textDecoration as data corresponding to multiple fields. Alternatively, it may be configured to include field data different from these. For example, when specifying the storage address, read address, data size, etc. of the text image data in the storage area 91AKM13 by the text image specifying information, the text image data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 is read without using the font data. , the corresponding text image can be displayed. In this case, the text display setting information does not need field data related to font settings, so it may be configured without including field data related to font settings such as fontFamily, fontSize, fontWeight, and fontStyle. On the other hand, in this case, in order to set the display size of the text image, the text display setting information may include separate field data regarding text display settings, such as textSize.

Scalable font data such as outline font data and vector font data stored in the storage area 91AKM13 may be prepared only as data corresponding to text images used in display effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be, for example, general-purpose Japanese font data. Data corresponding to a text image that is not limited to the text image used in the display effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as word font data, may be prepared. When only the font data corresponding to the text image used in the display effect are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, the increase in data capacity can be prevented when the text image used in the display effect is small. If general-purpose font data corresponding to text images that are not limited to text images used in display effects are stored in the storage area 91AKM13, reuse of the font data will be facilitated, so designing effects for displaying text images. It is possible to reduce the burden, and to prevent an increase in the data capacity when a large amount of text images are used in the display effect.

As a second component related to the text image, the specific text image, which can change the display mode including the display style and display layout of the text image at multiple timings, is not limited to the text image showing the line "Super hot" , any text image preset as a specific text image corresponding to a specific first component group. For example, among a plurality of types of text images, text images prepared in advance for displaying lyrics of music and text images prepared in advance for displaying subtitles of moving images may be used as specific text images. In this way, for specific text images corresponding to audio effects and display effects in which the effect content changes according to the elapsed time, such as the playback output of music and the playback display of moving images, the second component such as the display mode is set in a plurality of ways. It may be changeable with timing. Alternatively, a text image for which a specific display mode is set, such as a text image for rainbow display in which the display color of the text image is rainbow colors, or a text image for motif display in which the pattern or character decoration of the text image is a cherry blossom pattern. may be the specific text image. Alternatively, it is not limited to the text image of the display content that suggests that the display result of the variable display is highly likely to be a "jackpot", but the text image of the display content that suggests that the rate of being controlled to an arbitrary advantageous state is high. may be the specific text image. The advantageous state is not limited to the jackpot game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. In addition, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and it is executable in the time saving state. The upper limit number of times of variable display is the first number (for example, "100") that is higher than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the variable state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). 1 probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chances, which is the number of times repeatedly controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive chance number (for example, "5"). It may include a game situation that is more advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the number of consecutive wins (for example, "10").

A glossy text image is not limited to the case where gold corresponding to "gold" is set as the display color of the text image. may include a case where the display color of is set. When displaying a predetermined specific text image, the specific text image may be displayed in a glossy display mode without being limited to the display color of the text image. When displaying an arbitrary text image with glossiness, settings such as the textDecoration field in the text display setting information should be made so that it can be displayed with an effect image added around the text image. Just do it.

When a text image is displayed in a rainbow, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed and displayed within a predetermined range such as coordinates in characters and display time in the display of the text image. For example, if the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" in the color field in the text display setting information, by transitioning different display colors for each coordinate in the character of the text image. , rainbow display should be possible. For example, at the coordinates in the character 1, the display color is changed to red, then orange to yellow, then green, then light blue, then blue, and then blue purple to red purple, depending on the elapsed time. In addition, a plurality of display colors may be sequentially changed. At this time, considering the fact that red is a color that gives a strong impression to the human eye and that the change in blue becomes darker, we adjusted the brightness corresponding to each display color in the rainbow display, and The display colors in the coordinates within the character may be changed in order of red, orange, yellow, green, water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. After purplish-red, it is sufficient to return to red again and change the display color. As a result, the player can smoothly and clearly recognize the change in display color. In this way, when a special element is set as a character image component, such as when the display color of the text image is set to a rainbow color corresponding to "rainbow" by the color field in the text display setting information, the text display process Even if it is possible to display a text image in which multiple display colors are sequentially changed within the text image coordinates and display time range specified by the text image specification information corresponding to the text display period included in the table. good. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the display of the text image and to improve the interest of the presentation by the display of the text image. By sequentially changing different display colors according to the coordinates in the text image, the entire text image may be displayed in a rainbow display. Alternatively, by sequentially changing the common display color for all in-character coordinates, the display of the text image may be changed to a rainbow display according to the elapsed time. In this manner, a text image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed may be displayed within a predetermined range of either the intra-character coordinates or the display time.

The first component and the second component related to the text image may be changeable to different components depending on whether the player's specific action is detected, or the plurality of components may be changed at different ratios. Either can be changed. The player's specific action that enables the change of the first component and the second component related to the text image is, for example, a push operation or a pull operation on the operating rod of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, or other operations of the V stick controller 31A. An arbitrary motion of tilting the rod or a motion of pressing the push button 31b may be used. Not limited to those that can detect player's actions, for example, based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, such as the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, changes in the shape, pattern, or color of the detection target It may be possible to change the first component and the second component related to the text image. A detection device capable of detecting motion, change, difference, etc. in a detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detects the state of the detection target. Any configuration that can be detected will suffice. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of a detection target using a camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected, and the display content and display mode of the text image may be changed based on the detection result.

Some or all of the text image display effects using the text image data may be executed as setting suggesting effects capable of suggesting setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . For example, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT01 is 35/100 (=35%) if the set value is 1, and 30/100 (=30%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 25/100 (=25%), if the setting value is 4, it is 20/100 (=20%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 10/100 (=10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the text display process table 91AKT02 is 65/100 (=65%) if the set value is 1, and 70/100 (=70%) if the set value is 2. If the setting value is 3, it is 75/100 (=75%), if the setting value is 4, it is 80/100 (=80%), and if the setting value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%), and if the set value is 6, it may be set to 90/100 (=90%). According to the setting of such determination ratio, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP reach A (big hit)", the ratio at which the effect by text image display corresponding to either text display process pattern 91AKT01 or 91AKT02 is executed. are made different according to the set values in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT01 is likely to be executed, and as the set value increases, the text according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is displayed. The ratio of execution of effects by image display increases. Therefore, when the ready-to-win effect content is "SP ready-to-win A (big hit)", and the effect by the text image display according to the text display process table 91AKT02 is executed, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 is advantageous for the player. Expectations, which are set values that are reasonable, increase.

In addition, according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of a specific set value, setting suggestion effects may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a set value other than the specific set value. In this case, in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is provided a limit as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the set value is the specific set value. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the specific set value is set and is not executed when the set value is other than the specific set value. In this manner, within a range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, a limitation is provided as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in a range where the set value is other than the specific set value.

Depending on whether it is a special period or not, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios. For example, in the case of the special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in a period other than the special period, a limitation is provided as a limit that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the special period. A setting suggestion effect may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate in the special period and is not executed in the period other than the special period. In this manner, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate within the special period. On the other hand, within a period other than the special period, there is a limitation as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

Depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is a special period or not, arbitrary setting suggestion effects may be executed at different ratios. For example, when the special condition is established, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not established. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range where the special condition is satisfied. A setting suggestion performance may be provided that is executable at a predetermined rate when the special condition is met and is not executed when the special condition is not met. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate. On the other hand, in the range in which the special condition is not established, there is provided a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be established according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the result of judgment or decision of the game, or the progress or history of the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the performance. It may be any condition that can be established according to the determination or determination of. It is not limited to setting suggesting effects, and arbitrary effects may be executable at different rates depending on whether or not a preset condition is met, or whether such a condition is met. The effect mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether such a condition is satisfied. . In addition, an arbitrary effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset limit condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the limit condition is not satisfied. A limit may be provided as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and execution is difficult.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 91AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of a moving image using data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using data stored in the second storage area. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display is provided, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by the text display setting information. During the display period, the first component and the second component can be changed, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-7. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the character image control means can change the second component related to the character image when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period. good too. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 10-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data that can be used to display character images, such as outline font data. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 92AK)
A game machine capable of executing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image with a character image added, such as a reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B, For example, effect execution means such as the effect control microprocessor 91AK100, a first storage area such as a storage area 91AKM11 for storing data related to moving images, and a second storage area such as a storage area 91AKM13 for storing data related to character images. and moving image control means, such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a moving image renderer 91AK144, for controlling the display of a moving image using data stored in the first storage area, and character image display using data stored in the second storage area. A character image control means such as a video decoder 91AK143 and a text image renderer 91AK146 for controlling display is provided, and the data stored in the second storage area is the first component such as the text image specified by the text image specification information. and a second component such as a display style set by the text display setting information. and a second moving image different from the first moving image, such as a moving image using the moving image data 91AKD11, for example, a text image according to the text display process tables 91AKT01 and 91AKT02. , a character image using data relating to a common character image can be added and displayed. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the character image control means, when displaying the character image corresponding to the common first component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, controls the character image may be changeable. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means changes the second component related to the character image, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so as to reduce the processing load.

The character image control means is capable of displaying a specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group, such as a text image showing "Gekiatsu", for example. The second component may be changeable at multiple times. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The character image control means may be capable of individually changing and displaying the first component and the second component relating to the character image, as shown in FIG. 10-4, for example. This makes it possible to appropriately control the display so that various character image displays are executed.

The data stored in the second storage area may include outline data such as outline font data that can be used to display character images. As a result, various character images can be displayed easily and with high quality, and appropriate display control can be performed so as to prevent an increase in data capacity and processing load.

When a specific element such as when the color field is "gold" is set as a character image component, for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to add an effect image to the surroundings and display it. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

When a special element such as "rainbow" is set in the color field as a character image component, for example, red, orange, yellow, green, red, orange, yellow, green, etc. It may be possible to display a character image in which a plurality of display colors are sequentially changed, such as changing in order of water, blue, bluish purple, and reddish purple. As a result, it is possible to appropriately control the display so as to enhance the player's impression of the character image display and improve the interest of the character image display.

(Explanation related to association of characteristic parts)
The configuration regarding the characteristic portions 91AK and 92AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of the configuration regarding the characteristic portion 60AK. For example, an operation effect to be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed can be executed as a setting suggestion effect, which is an operation effect of the suggestion effect mode, and during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, the first component and the second component may be changeable, and character images using common character image data for the first moving image and the second moving image different from the first moving image may be changed. It may be possible to add and display.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and has a character image added. Effect execution means (for example, effect control microprocessor 91AK100, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect for displaying a moving image (for example, reach effect of SP reach A or SP reach B), and first storage for storing data related to moving image a second storage area (for example, storage area 91AKM13) for storing data relating to character images; means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, moving image renderer 91AK144, etc.) and character image control means (for example, video decoder 91AK143, text image renderer 91AK146, etc.) for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area. The data in the second storage area includes a first component (for example, a text image specified by text image specification information) and a second component (for example, a display style set by text display setting information). wherein the character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image, (See, for example, FIG. 10-7), further suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control Step 097IWS104 in CPU 120 selects a process table containing Super Reach A to C and executes Steps 097IWS106 and S305), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) during execution of the suggestive effect, and the specific image is an image display means capable of displaying different predetermined images (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) (for example, at step 097IWS104 in the production control CPU 120, a process table including super reach A to C and chance up production is selected. step 097 IWS106, S305), and the suggestive effect execution means includes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, super reach A) and a second suggestive effect (for example, super reach B). The suggestive effects (for example, Super Reach A to C) can be executed, and the image display means displays, as the specific image, at least a first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4) can be displayed, and a second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, and image B3) can be displayed during execution of the second suggestive effect, and a normal mode (for example, , white) and a special mode (e.g., blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than in the normal mode. It is possible, and the predetermined image is a display mode unrelated to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. The display mode does not change), and the image display means adds a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow) when displaying the specific image in the special mode. and a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) is added when the specific image is displayed in the normal mode. and a game machine capable of displaying the specific image (see FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16).

Such a configuration enables appropriate display control. Also, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is the preview image, and to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

As a specific effect for displaying a moving image to which a character image is added, the character image control is performed when displaying the moving image to which the character image is added in a suggestive effect that suggests whether or not control is performed in an advantageous state. The first component and the second component may be changed during the display period of the character image added to one moving image by means. By doing so, since the effect of the moving image to which the character image is added is executed by appropriate display control, the suggestive effect and the display of the specific image are more preferably performed by the moving image to which the character image is added. can be executed, and the game interest is improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that enables appropriate display control and allows a player to pay attention to a specific image, a game is played and an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) is provided for the player. ), a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the effect control CPU 120 Step 097IWS104 selects a process table containing super reach A to C and executes steps 097IWS106 and S305), and a specific image (for example, a chance up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image during the execution of the suggestive effect Image display means capable of displaying images (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) (for example, at step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120, select a process table including super reach A to C and chance up effect and step 097IWS106 , part for executing S305), and the suggestive effect execution means includes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, super reach A) and a second suggestive effect (for example, super reach B). , Super Reach A to C), and the image display means displays at least a first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as a specific image during execution of the first suggestive effect. ) can be displayed, and a second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, and image B3) can be displayed during execution of the second suggestive effect, and a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white); It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) that suggests that the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than in the normal mode, and the predetermined image is controlled in an advantageous state (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16, the display modes of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 do not change), and the image display means is a special mode. When displaying a specific image in the normal mode, it is possible to display the specific image by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), and display the specific image in the normal mode In this case, the specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) different from the first special effect element (see FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16). Game machines are mentioned. Examples of the form examples of these gaming machines will be described below as other form examples.

(Description of characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characterizing part 103SG of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the present embodiment, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed description by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the up, down, left, and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Described as a standard. Incidentally, the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is the facing face facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

(Example 1)
Next, the gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-19.

First, FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-3, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, a glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball-hitting handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is the left-game area 103SG002L by operating the ball-hitting handle 30. This is the game area where a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 103SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 103SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is accommodated in a board case 103SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 103SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also.

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052, is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 103SG051 and the setting-switching switch 103SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 103SG201.

Since the substrate case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 103SG003 is closed. Operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch that can execute switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, with a setting key. In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be shared by one key.

A display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 103SG201. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 103SG201. In other words, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 103SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 103SG025A, second reservation display 103SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 103SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation storage, A round display 103SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display unit 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 103SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension display 103SG025A and the second suspension display 103SG025B each have 4-segment LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 103SG025A and second pending display 103SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up, and as the number of pending memories increases, the second from the left, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, every time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment). In the section 103SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 103SG025A is lit, and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A memory-based variable display is performed.

Also, the round indicator 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the jackpot types in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 103SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

Note that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 103SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321, and the second movable body 103SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. An origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 11-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 103SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the identified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big winning game state or the small winning game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program and performs control operations, and a numerical data that indicates a random value is updated independently of the CPU 103. random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data in the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 11-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-5, in the characteristic part 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 11-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 11-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Instead of first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After the type of the variation pattern is first determined from the random number value for pattern type determination, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6, a form is exemplified in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may differ depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern will be normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous performance three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and variation patterns of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special design) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special design) shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A variation pattern determination table, a deviation variation pattern determination table, a normal pattern display result determination table (not illustrated), a normal pattern variation pattern determination table (not illustrated), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 11-7A and 11-7B are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the setting value is 1, 1/280 when the setting value is 2, 1/260 when the setting value is 3, setting 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6). Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characterizing section 103SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the setting value is 1, 1/180 when the setting value is 2, and 1/180 when the setting value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is defined as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 11-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Also, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state, but the stop symbols on the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In this embodiment, a total of six set values, 1 to 6, are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figures 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 11-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 11-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11-9. In the characteristic portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends and the jackpot A (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability-high base state, and the jackpot game. A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 0 to 299 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. In other words, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number for judging the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of a big hit, the easier it is to determine the big win C as the type of big win). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in the case of changing the playability according to the setting value in this way, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot. A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), if the setting value is "1", 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the MR3 determination value , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 180 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 160 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "4", 1 to 140 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "5", 1 to 120 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) determines the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in the present embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of big win is "big win B" or "big win C", and the type of big win is "big win A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player thinks that "big win B" or "big win C" will be achieved. can raise the expectations of

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997 Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), if the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for deviation (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 481 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 460 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", 1 to 400 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, a shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), a super Predetermined random values within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the reach α deviation and the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation are assigned as judgment values. It is

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for loss C (for the low base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, when the set value is "6", out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (D), in the variation pattern determination table D for deviation (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation. In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In this way, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Each is assigned to a variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are completely the same between each set value as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a miss, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a failure, regardless of the set value that has been set, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the variation pattern of super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, it may be the same.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α and the variation pattern of the super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a big hit, the set value is the same. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, a mode is exemplified in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach differs according to the set value. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 11-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not stored, and when the number of pending memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the super reach loss variation The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, a form is exemplified in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach out according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. , The present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executed with a variation pattern of

Further, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG.

Further, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characterizing portion 103SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the display monitor 103SG029 has a first display section 103SG029A, a second display section 103SG029B, a third display section 103SG029C, and a fourth display section 103SG029D. Each of the first display portion 103SG029A to the fifth display portion 103SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 103SG029A to fifth display section 103SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the characteristic part 103SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 103SG029, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (B) and 11-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all gaming states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 103SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A, and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display section 103SG029B in order to display "b3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 103SG029C and the fourth display portion 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. When it is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 103SG029, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without executing the setting value change processing described later by the CPU 103. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 11-13 are flowcharts showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (103SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), proceed to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (103SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), proceed to 103SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010). move on.

At 103SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). If the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 103SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (103SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (103SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (103SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the set value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is designated as an identifiable set value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (103SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, when the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 103SG029 is ended.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF at 103SGSa011 (103SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the processes of 103SGSa013a to 103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 103SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 103SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e) , and proceed to 103SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, as indicated by 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017 to 103SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), proceed to 103SGSa022; (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

In addition, at 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened, the lock switch 103SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (103SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the processes 103SGSa009 to 103SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

Further, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (103SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (103SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (103SGSa026; N), the processing of 103SGSa025 and 103SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 103SG029 stops blinking (103SGSa027) and proceeds to 103SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, an example is illustrated in which all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 103SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 103SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (103SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (103SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power failure during the setting change described later, etc., to the effect control board 12. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (103SGSa034; N), the processing of 103SGSa033 and 103SGSa034 is repeatedly executed. 103SG029A, second display unit 103SG029B, third display unit 103SG029C, and fourth display unit 103SG029D constituting the display monitor 103SG029 as a notification (error notification) of recovery from a power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (103SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 103SGSa032 to 103SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 103SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are notified of the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing part 103SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (103SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON at 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined at 103SGSa014 that the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014 ;Y).

11-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 103SG194A Various command data and various flags stored with the buffer number are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set at 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning, 1 buffer number It shifts up by minutes (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 103SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, sets three symbols as even number as the stop symbols. A combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, a combination of decoration patterns (jackpot pattern) in which the three patterns are "7" as the stop pattern. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable probability big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decoration symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determining process shown in FIGS. 11-15, and determines whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Effect during variable display)
The effect during the variable display includes, as a result of effect, an advantageous state suggestion result that suggests control to the jackpot game state, a setting suggestion result that suggests the setting of the set value performed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process, It is an effect (predetermined effect) that can be either. In this characterizing part 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a ready-to-win notice (announcement effect) that suggests the possibility of a big hit with the variable display mode becoming a reach as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggesting result. be. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the setting values 1 to 6 the setting value is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in which both the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion can be executed when the effect result can be either the advantageous state suggesting result or the setting suggesting result. When it is possible, it is possible to execute the ready-to-reach notice in which the performance result is the advantageous state suggestion result, prior to the setting suggestion in which the performance result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 11-16, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9. When the execution is determined, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the basis of which the variable display effect is to be executed, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is the effect mode. It is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 11-18 (A) to (C), the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display of the pattern (timing before the variable display mode becomes ready-to-win). Then, a plurality of (e.g., eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area, The effect during variable display ends by fading out to the right side of the display area. In addition, while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side, an image Z2 may be displayed showing that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies will break and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies will break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies will break and fall. , In the case of the pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and dropped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (B) and 11-19 (A), patterns PT-1 to PT-8 all have the same timing at which the paraglider is destroyed, and each pattern PT-1 to A number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number of them may be fine). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-19(B), pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall, similar to pattern PT-8. 8 is different. Specifically, 7 paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining 1 body is destroyed at the 2nd timing after the 1st timing when the other 7 bodies are destroyed. .

The production period of such variable display production is executed based on which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, that is, the ready-to-reach notice in which the production result is an advantageous state suggestion result or the production result is a setting suggestion result Regardless of which of the setting suggestion is to be and a non-common mode effect that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result (for example, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is displayed on the image display device 5, and a non-common effect period during which the effect of moving downward in the display area of No. 5) is executed.

In addition, in the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as an effect during the variable display, the decorative patterns are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, but the decorative patterns are displayed in a smaller size than usual. Small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. In addition, during the execution period of the effect during variable display, another notice effect or the like different from the effect during variable display may be executed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. For patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are specific patterns (specific modes) corresponding to the setting suggestion that suggests which one of ~ 6, and the number of paragliders destroyed is 8, It is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to a reach notice that suggests the possibility of reach. In other words, during the variable display effect, the effect mode in the common effect period is the same, but the suggested target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode (the number of paragliders to be destroyed) in the non-common effect period, and 1 to 7 paragliders are displayed. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest the possibility that the set values are odd numbers (eg, 1, 3, 5), and patterns PT-2 and PT-4 suggest that the set values are even numbers. (eg, 2, 4, 6). 6 suggests that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (e.g., 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (e.g., 6). .

Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of set values 5 and 6 (high setting) is determined. The first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low expectation that the The second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high);

In this characteristic portion 103SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set low and the setting values 5 and 6 are high, but the setting values 1 to 3 may be low and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

On the other hand, pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the pattern may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and pattern PT-9 suggests the possibility that the variable display of the pattern will be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding pattern PT-8, the first special pattern with low expectation of super reach by being determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the pattern is normal reach {reach notice (low), first specific aspect}, and for pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach advance notice (high), second special mode}.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 is a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests control to the jackpot game state and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-9) that suggests settings. 1 to PT-7), a variable display effect can be executed based on one of a plurality of types of effect modes including pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of special mode) When setting suggestions (predetermined effects of specific aspects) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can all be executed, ready-to-win announcements can be executed with priority over setting suggestions.

In the first embodiment, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 are determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Since the variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a loss than when the result is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 is a super reach, that is, the degree of expectation for a big hit is the pattern. While it is a lower pattern than PT-9, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is a loss, so the pattern PT-9 is , Super Reach, that is, a pattern with a higher expectation for a big hit than the pattern PT-8.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, in the effect during the variable display, the number of paragliders destroyed indicates the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set. It is not limited to this, and a big hit or high setting may be suggested by the appearance of a predetermined number (e.g., eight) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and to suggest which setting value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, such as the number of appearances of characters, the type of characters that appear, etc. It may be possible to suggest a big hit or a set value by means of.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the numbers corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or illuminating the game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that a big hit or a pattern with a high degree of expectation is set.

As shown in FIG. 11-15, in the process of determining effects during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variable display result and a variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (loss, non-probability variable big win A, probability variable big win B, probability variable big win C, small win) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the . Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, while extracting the random number for determining the reach notice type, using the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. A lottery is held to determine the type of reach advance notice in the case of 103SGS292.

In the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. , and 60 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-9. In other words, when the variation pattern is super reach, PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than super reach.

When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. there is In other words, when the variation pattern is normal reach, PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than normal reach.

Also, when the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the variation pattern is normal reach, the pattern PT-8 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is normal reach, and when the variation pattern is super reach, The pattern PT-9 is more likely to be won at a higher rate than the cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when the production based on the pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach fluctuation pattern than the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the production based on the pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is highly likely that it is a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and the pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is a pattern of reach notice (high) with high expectations for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 11-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of performing a lottery for the presence or absence of the reach notice execution and the type in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). If it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294), Go to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-9 is not won in 103SGS292, that is, if reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 is won, reach notice is not executed or pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) } is won, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read out to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS295). Next, while extracting the setting suggestion type determination random number, using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value specified in 103SGS295, whether or not setting suggestion is executed in the effect during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-17(B), when the setting value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1. , 10 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 25 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 decision values are assigned to pattern PT-4, and pattern Four judgment values are assigned to PT-5, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-6, and one judgment value is not assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, Five judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 15 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. A decision value is assigned, and no decision value is assigned to pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-1, 5 determination values are assigned to pattern PT-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-4, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-5, and 25 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-6. Determination values are assigned, and five determination values are assigned to pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number of 1 or 3, patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. If the set value is an even number 2 or 4, patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are likely to be won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and if the set value is 5 , pattern PT-5 is likely to win at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, pattern PT-6 wins at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's getting easier. In addition, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, the set value of 6 is confirmed when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 where the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the setting value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider will be destroyed. If an effect based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number of characters displayed is 5 or more is likely to appear, there is a high possibility that the set value is either 5 or 6. In other words, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are suggested to be high (set value 5 or 6) with a low possibility of being set (low), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set to high (set value 5 or 6). 6) is set as a setting suggestion (high) with a high possibility.

In the first embodiment, the random number for determining the reach announcement type and the random number for determining the setting suggestion type are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of determination values of each determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number may be determined as appropriate. Just do it. In addition, each determination random number counter for generating these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in random number update processing.

Returning to FIG. 11-15, the effect control CPU 120, as a result of performing the lottery of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} A decision is made as to whether or not the prize has been won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been elected, if the non-execution of the reach announcement is elected in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on is uniquely determined, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298), and proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won , Based on the non-execution of the setting suggestion or the winning of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at 103SGS297, it is determined whether the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is winning at 103SGS293 (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was won in 103SGS300, when non-execution of setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is elected in 103SGS297, reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 Execution is determined (103SGS301) over setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 through PT-4 and proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined that pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is not won in 103SGS300, it is determined whether any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined (103SGS302), and if any one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is selected, it is decided to execute the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Also, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 have been won, that is, if the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without determining the execution of the variable display effect. Terminate the effect determination process.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any one of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 11-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution determination flag is set at 103SGS278, that is, whether or not the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277 is performed. In the process, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display of any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined.

When the variable display effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, sets the period until the start of the variable display effect start waiting timer for variable display effect start (103SGS279), and executes the variable display effect effect. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, when the effect execution determination flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the effect during variable display, in this characteristic part 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the effect during variable display. Since the effect during variable display is specified based on and is set to start the effect during variable display, the period until the start timing of effect during variable display is set to the timer for waiting to start the effect during variable display. The present invention is not limited to this. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the effect during variable display is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

At 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the production control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (103SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (103SGS286).

Thus, in the present embodiment 1, the effect control CPU 120, when executing the variable display of the symbols based on the reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode At performance timing, it is possible to execute either a reach notice or a setting suggestion as a performance during variable display, and when determining whether or not to execute the performance during variable display, the reach notice becomes an advantageous state suggestion result as a performance result. It is possible to execute the (special mode effect) with priority over the setting suggestion (specific mode effect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display in FIGS. take precedence over

That is, the effect control CPU120, in the lottery of the reach notice, if the variation pattern is super reach, to determine the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294), reach Notice (high) will be executed (prioritized) at a higher rate than setting suggestions. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8 is 60%. , even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296 based on the reach notice (low) winning, setting suggestions based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at 103SGS297 (high ) is not won, 103SGS301 will determine the execution of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, so reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (preferred) than the setting suggestion. Become.

In addition, the reach notice includes reach notice (low) and reach notice (high) that suggests that the ratio of control to a big hit is higher than the reach notice (low), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the pattern PT -9 and the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are executable, the reach prediction (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is set to the pattern PT- 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest caused by the effect during the variable display due to the excessive priority given to the advance notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

In addition, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) that suggests that the setting suggestion (low) is likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). -When both setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, patterns PT-5 to PT-7 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-8 Predictive reach (low) based on 103SGS301 can be executed in preference to setting suggestions (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the effect during the variable display due to excessive priority given to the setting suggestion and the restriction on the execution of the ready-to-win announcement.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For more information, Reach Warning High precedes Setting Suggestion High, Setting Reach Warning High precedes Reach Warning Low, and Reach Warning Low precedes Setting Suggestion ( low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "prediction of reach (high)>suggestion of setting (high)>prediction of reach (low)>suggestion of setting (low)".

In this characteristic part 103SG, it is sufficient that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the effect during variable display is a effect executed during the variable display period of the pattern, and the ready-to-reach notice suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least It suggests which set value is not changed during the operating period. In addition, it is not preferable for the game arcade that setting suggestions are frequently made and the player can easily guess what the set value is. Therefore, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the variable display effect is executed when the set value is high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. However, since the suggestion of a big win can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the ready-to-win notice appears at a higher rate than the set suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display production is a production that is executed only during the variable display period of the pattern based on the super reach fluctuation pattern or the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation for big hits than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is a reach. In this case, the player's expectation for the big win is higher than in the case where the reach is not achieved. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, particularly in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot will decrease, and the production will become inappropriate. It is possible to prevent the presentation from becoming inappropriate by executing the notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as a tendency of the effect during variable display, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and a high In some situations, such as setting, the execution ratio may be set such that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is preferentially executed (before) the lottery for the setting suggestion. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution ratio of the ready-to-win announcement becomes higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the setting suggestion lottery may be performed prior to the ready-to-reach announcement lottery. , the order is arbitrary. In addition, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach announcement is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, It is not limited to what is described.

In the present embodiment 1, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a setting suggestion that suggests a setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified. is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 has changed since the pachinko game machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the first invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, the timing when a predetermined period has passed since the variable display of the symbol was started (variable display mode is a timing before becoming a reach)), it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is the first embodiment shown in FIG. 11- 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the ready-to-win announcement lottery, the execution of the ready-to-win announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined with priority over the setting suggestions in 103SGS294. Even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed at 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, 103SGS301 Reach notice (low ) is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, etc. / Production control CPU 120, reach notice (high) > setting suggestion (high) > Reach notice (low) > Part that determines the execution of the production based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at the ratio of setting suggestion (low) (see Figure 11-20 of modification 1))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the performance from being inappropriate due to the execution of the predetermined performance in the specific mode when the control is performed in the advantageous state.
Specifically, even if the variable display result is a big hit, setting suggestions that can be suggested even at timings other than the variable display are prioritized over the reach notice. , the player's expectation for the big win cannot be suitably increased, and the performance can be prevented from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., reach notice (low)) and a second special mode (e.g., reach notice (high)) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, , When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the lottery for the ready-to-win announcement in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIGS. high) is determined prior to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIGS. Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to excessive restriction on the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific mode includes a first specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific mode (for example, setting suggestion (high )) and
The predetermined effect execution means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second specific mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, , If any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIGS. -Part that determines the execution of setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 with priority over reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific mode and the predetermined effect of the special mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific mode. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the lottery for the reach notice in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from deteriorating due to the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode being excessively restricted.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
Action prompt notification means capable of executing action prompt notification prompting the player to perform an action (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation prompt effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. executable part.) and
Action detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific action (for example, action of operating push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the action promotion notification by the action promotion notification means is being executed. and,
with
The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific action by the action detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can press the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific action to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can execute an effect to change to the image Z2 (destroy the paraglider and make it fall).Modified example)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a player who knows the specific action can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period during which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, either a reach notice or a setting suggestion) A common effect period during which an effect is executed in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area regardless of whether there is a common effect period) and the predetermined special mode. A non-common effect period that can specify whether it is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, it is possible to specify whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIGS. 11-18)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player as to whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode will be executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and is also a suggestion of setting (for example, both reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed. Sometimes, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) is displayed (for example, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a moving paraglider with a character appearing, etc.) is displayed. parts, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the ready-to-reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) are executable means, for example, the suggestion about the display result of one variable display. Any timing may be used as long as it is the timing at which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the pending memory If the display result is suggested, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory is executed and during the execution period of the variable display. . In addition, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

In addition, when both reach notice (predetermined effect of special mode) and setting suggestion (predetermined effect of specific mode) can be executed, reach notice can be executed with priority over setting suggestion. The lottery is executed with priority over the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is preceded by the execution of the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 and executing reach announcements based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It should be noted that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes the case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice execution rate is 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the number of destroyed paragliders suggests the possibility of a big hit or a set value, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executable. As an example, the effect result is either an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are executed when they can be executed. Both the advantageous state suggesting result and the setting suggesting result may be included as the effect during variable display.

That is, in the first embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common common effect period between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the reach notice and the setting suggestion have different production modes (the common effect period It does not have a corresponding period) may be a separate production (specifically, the reach announcement is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the characteristic portion 103SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-20. 11-20, (A) is a flow chart showing the processing for determining effects during variable display as Modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing execution ratios of ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the presence or absence of the execution of the reach notice and the type of the reach notice is performed with priority over the presence or absence of the execution of the setting suggestion and the lottery of the type, so that the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery for ready-to-win notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-20(A), in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, along with extracting a random number for determining the effect type, using a table C (not shown) for determining the type of effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting), presence or absence of execution of effect (prediction of reach/suggestion of setting) during variable display, A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach advance notice or setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS312).

Although not shown, the effect (reach notice/setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) sets the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 according to the type of variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratio of the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 varies depending on the type of variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, but the execution ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion shown in FIG. 11-20 (B) As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (preferred) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. (For example, 50% reach notice, 40% setting suggestion, and 10% non-execution are determined).

Also, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is super reach, reach notice (high) is higher than reach notice (low) (for example, reach notice (high) 40%, reach notice (low) 10%) is preferably determined by Also, if the setting values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) to setting suggestion (low) is higher than setting suggestion (high) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35%, setting suggestion (low) is 5 %). In other words, the effect control CPU 120 is the ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low) of the effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 Decide to execute.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is exemplified as a form in which the execution ratio is determined based on the variation pattern and the setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this, Depending on the variation pattern, the set value, and the result of the variable display, the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different. Specifically, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach variation pattern, when the hit is a big hit, the reach notice is given priority over the setting suggestion at a higher rate than when the loss occurs. is preferred.

Further, in the first embodiment and modified example 1, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either one of the ready-to-reach notice and the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display. Although the possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the effect during variable display is It is also possible to make it possible to execute a suggesting effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggesting result and a set suggesting result.

As the suggestive effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 18, when the paraglider image Z1 is displayed, (e.g. displaying an image of a moving paraglider in which appears), or displaying images in which the display mode of the paraglider (e.g., color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode It may be displayed, the background color may be changed, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or a light emitting body may emit light in a special light emission mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the effect during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the effect during the variable display, the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be made variable. Each of them may be independently executable at a performance timing different from the presentation during display.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice in a manner different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. On the other hand, setting suggestions in a manner different from the setting suggestions shown in FIGS. It may be executable.

(Example 2)
In Example 1 of the characterizing part 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display of , the effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A) as the second embodiment, the first period is between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach, targeting the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. Effect during variable display can be executed in a second period after the first period.

Since the variable display time for non-reach and small hit variation patterns is too short to execute the effect during variable display twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach are the targets for execution of the effect during variable display. However, non-reach and small hit variation patterns may be included as targets for execution of effects during variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described effect determination processing during variable display, whether or not to execute effect during variable display is determined according to the variation pattern using the effect execution determination table during variable display shown in FIG. 11-21B. determined by different percentages. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21(B), when the variation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 variable-display effect execution determination random numbers are stored in the variable-display effect execution determination table. are assigned to the execution of the effect during variable display, and 60 are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display. Further, when the variation pattern is super reach, 60 of the 100 variable-display effect execution determination random numbers are assigned to the execution of the variable-display effect execution in the variable-display effect execution determination table. are assigned to non-execution of effects during variable display.

In addition, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined in the second embodiment, the effect during variable display is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 11-21(A).

When the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the ready-to-reach notice is determined at different ratios between the effect during the variable display and the effect during the variable display executed during the second period. In the same period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution ratio of setting suggestion and ready-to-win notice is set to be the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-23, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined when the variation pattern is normal reach, the effect type during variable display (effect PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the setting value set in pachinko machine 1. , pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation (high)) at a rate of 40%. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) was determined, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation) at a rate of 60% (high)).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 and 11-24, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT- at a rate of 1% 5 to PT-7 {Suggestion setting (high)}, 35% decided pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.2% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% decided to pattern PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 35% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 and 11-26, when the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 decided to {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 15%, pattern PT-9 {reach notice at a rate of 25% (high)}. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.2% determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, 2.2% determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 decided to {setting suggestion (low)}, at a rate of 1.5% decided to one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, at a rate of 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. -4 determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, 3.5% determined to be one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 15% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is set to patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. One of {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, 5% of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are determined to be {setting suggestion (high)}, and 15% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach The rate (60%) at which the execution of notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach It is set higher than the percentage (40%) at which execution of advance notice (low) or reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice, which is a result of suggesting an advantageous state. It is possible to heighten expectations for a big hit.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26, any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) Or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined In the second period, regarding the effect type of the variable display effect executed during the second period, the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. Any one of PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion to set (low) or suggestion to set (high)} is set higher than the determined rate.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 corresponding to the reach announcement are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are determined in the second period. By being determined at a lower rate than the first period in the period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion in the second period. .

For this reason, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the effect during the variable display in the second period, that is, during the variable display As the effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice is lowered (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed at the first time, so that the variable display Since the player can predict that there is a high possibility that the variable display will become super reach before the advance notice is executed twice, the player's expectation for the variable display being super reach is reduced. It is designed so that it can be suppressed.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26, the effect during variable display executed in the second period is more favorable than the effect during variable display executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any one of pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the effect during variable display is executed, the effect during variable display is more likely to be executed in pattern PT-9, so the game for the effect during variable display being executed in pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-8. It can sustain people's expectations.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display is executed twice in the first period and the second period. However, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more. In the case where the effect during variable display is executed three or more times in this way, by setting the determination ratio of the effect type so that the pattern PT-9 is likely to be determined each time the effect during variable display is executed, It may be possible to maintain the technician's sense of expectation for a longer period of time.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- as the effect type. 1 to PT-7 {Suggestion of setting (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined at different rates, so the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during the second period are executed. It is difficult for setting suggestions to be executed continuously during the variable display effect. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during variable display due to execution of setting suggestions in both of these two effects during variable display.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26, the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period have pattern PT- 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are determined differently, so the variable display effect executed in the first period and the second period are executed It is difficult to continuously execute the reach notice with the effect during variable display. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to monotony of the effect during the variable display due to execution of the ready-to-win announcement in both of these two effects during the variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26, the production control CPU 120 executes the variable display production during the first period and the variable display production during the second period. In the case of executing, the form in which the rate of execution of reach notice is different as the effect during variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is controlled in the first period In the case of executing the effect during variable display and the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period, the rate at which the ready-to-win announcement is executed as the effect during variable display may be the same. By doing so, when the effect during the variable display is executed in the first period and the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is executed as the effect during the variable display in the first period and the second period. , the player can be expected in the same way.

In addition, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, if the forewarning effect during variable display is executed in the same period, Although the rate at which the reach notice is determined to be executed is the same as the effect during variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the notice effect during variable display executed during the same period , the rate at which execution of the ready-to-win announcement is determined as the effect during variable display may differ according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁By doing so, according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed as the effect during the variable display changes in the first period and the second period, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the middle production from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment 2, as shown in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-26, when focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the first period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (pattern PT-1 to Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the rate of determining the execution of any pattern PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same rate, and the rate of determining the reach notice (pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9 execution ratio) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine. Similarly, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) It is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the ratio that determines the reach notice (the ratio that determines the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set in the pachinko machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6, the effect during variable display executed during the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) always Setting suggestions are executed at a rate of 60% and reach notices are executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display effect executed in the second period (second variable display effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the ready-to-win announcement is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be made to expect the execution of the setting suggestion in the same way.

In addition, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, there are more opportunities to provide reach notices and setting suggestions in one variable display, which improves interest. .

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than during the variable display (for example, the ending of the jackpot game state or the variable display However, it is during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention while playing the game. Therefore, in the effect during the variable display in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, it is possible not only to execute the setting suggestion during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays most attention to, but also to perform the setting suggestion. As described above, by enabling the effect during variable display to be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to not only increase the chances of executing the setting suggestion, but also to increase the chances of executing the setting suggestions. If it is executed at a rate higher than , it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the ready-to-win announcement in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the ready-to-win announcement even in the variation pattern of the big win.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and non-execution of neither reach announcement nor setting suggestion may be determined in at least one of the first period and the second period.

In the case where non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the reach announcement must be different between the first period and the second period. can let Further, even if the execution ratio of the reach announcement is set to be the same between the first period and the second period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When it is possible to execute either setting suggesting effect, no consideration is given as to which effect is given priority, and when the control is in an advantageous state, the setting suggesting effect that makes the set value is executed, etc. Therefore, there is a problem that the performance becomes inappropriate. Therefore, with the object of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display setting suggestion based on, or a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 can be executed),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as a second embodiment, As shown, during variable display of normal reach or super reach, the predetermined effect is executed at the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times than when the predetermined effect is executed at the first number of times among the plurality of times. When executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 The reach based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is better in the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period than in the case of executing the effect during variable display. The part where the notice is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in the effect during variable display executed in the second period, the ready-to-reach notice is more likely to be executed than in the effect during variable display executed in the first period. It is possible to heighten expectations for being controlled to the big win game state during the second period, which is closer to the end timing of the variable display than the first period.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means is capable of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode at a rate lower than the rate of executing the predetermined effect in the specific mode in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-22 as the second embodiment, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during variable display in the first period during the second period after the first period. A part that executes a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns, at a lower rate when executing a variable display effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation for an advantageous state by making it easier to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, even if non-execution of the variable display effect cannot be determined, it is possible to determine the ready-to-win notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
When the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-22 as a second embodiment Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is changed to the special pattern PT- 8 or the part that runs at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-22 as the second embodiment Furthermore, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period, the ready-to-reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is changed to the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to The part that runs at a higher rate than suggested by any of the PT-7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special mode is more likely to be executed, while the predetermined effect of the specific mode is less likely to be executed. It is possible to suitably increase the sense of expectation.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-21, a form is exemplified in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the ready-to-win effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect during variable display may be executed even during execution of the ready-to-win effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect during variable display),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode for suggesting settings (for example, setting suggestions (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4), and settings and types suggested by the first suggestion mode. A second suggestion mode (for example, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions regarding different settings of
When the predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing both the predetermined effect of the first suggested mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggested mode when executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times (for example, as the second embodiment shown in FIG. 11-21, during variable display of normal reach and super reach), when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times, the predetermined effect is executed later than the first number of the plurality of times. When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode can be executed at a higher rate (for example, FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26 and FIGS. As shown in -31, when the production control CPU 120 can execute the production during variable display in the first period and the second period during the variable display of normal reach or super reach as the second or third embodiment, The part where the setting suggestion (strong) is executed at a higher rate when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period than when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined performance is repeatedly executed, the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode becomes easier, so that the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined performance of the second suggestive mode is maintained. can be done.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-26, in the effect during variable display executed during the second period, setting suggestions (strong) are made more than during the effect during variable display executed during the first period. is easily executed, it is possible to keep the player's expectation for the high set value such as 4 to 6 set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests the odd number setting or the even number setting, and the first suggestion The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode that makes suggestions about settings different from the setting suggested by the mode, is a mode that suggests an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The set value suggested by the mode and the set value suggested by the second suggestion mode may all be different set values (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the set value 1 and the second suggestion mode suggests the set value 1). If the value 6 is suggested, or if the first suggestion mode suggests odd settings 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even settings 2, 4, 6, etc.), the first suggestion mode suggests Both the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode and the setting value suggested by the second suggestion mode may include a common setting value (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests setting values 1 to 4, and the second suggestion mode is When suggesting set values 3 to 6 above the middle), even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion regarding a setting change, and the other is a suggestion regarding a setting value that has been set. good. In other words, not only when the set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also when there are a plurality of set values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode, the settings to be suggested Including those with different numbers or ranges of values, or those with different suggested contents.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means specifies when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, including the first suggestive mode and the second suggestive mode. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the corresponding Portion where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.
Specifically, after setting the execution ratio of all setting suggestions to be the same in the first period and the second period (or a lower ratio in the second period than in the first period), the effect during variable display in the first period Avoid excessive setting suggestions by executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined effect execution means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on a special pattern, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the control is in an advantageous state,
When executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a rate higher than the rate of executing the predetermined effect of the special mode in the first number of times (e.g., Embodiment 2 As shown in FIG. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period rather than executing the effect during variable display in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a high rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the ratio of execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be heightened at a timing close to the result of one game.
Note that, in the second embodiment, if the execution ratio of all setting suggestions is the same between the first period and the second period, setting suggestions (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, it is possible to execute the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and the effect control as shown in FIG. The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the variable display effect process),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can The part where the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a special aspect or a specific aspect of the predetermined effect in one variable display, thereby improving interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, the CPU 103 executes special symbol variation processing as shown in FIG. 5 to perform variable display of special symbols, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7 The part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern by executing the effect processing during variable display),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is Part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a pre-reading notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until start)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the set mode can be executed before the variable display as one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined effect in a special mode, which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are executable, a specific image suggesting both the big win and the highest setting (set value 6) (for example, when displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider, the paraglider in which the character appears moves image, etc.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the execution of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the special mode different from the specific mode, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Fourth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 as a second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times out of a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed. It can be executed at different rates (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-22 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and after the first period). The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 differs from the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the probability of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display at a higher rate than the execution of the ready-to-win notice in the first period, while in the second period , by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during the variable display at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, Since the ready-to-win notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced. In the first period, the execution of setting suggestions may be determined at a lower rate than the reach notice, while in the second period, the setting suggestions may be decided at a higher rate than the reach notice. .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period, pattern PT-8. Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
In addition, in the second embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the ready-to-reach notice can be made the same while the setting suggestion execution ratio is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, 11-22 as a second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the production)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, in the first period, while determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, in the second period, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate lower than the execution of the reach notice In the second period, which is the timing close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but it is also easy to execute the ready-to-win notice, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display in the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing the effect during variable display in the second period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-21 as a second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect. part),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the same rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. Regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, and the effect during the variable display executed in the second period is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes suggestions at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first set value or the second set value is set, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times does not change, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change. You can expect the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-26, regardless of which value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is executed in the first period. The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display and the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during variable display that is executed in the second period do not change, that is, the set value is Since the situation of setting suggestions is the same regardless of whether the low setting value or the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value depending on the appearance situation of the setting suggestions.

In the second embodiment, even if any value from 1 to 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display executed in the first period. Although the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestions are executed as the effect during the variable display executed during the second period is not different from the ratio (appearance situation) at which the suggestion is executed during the second period, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of the plurality of setting values 1 to 6; If the ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestion is executed as the effect during the variable display executed in the second period is the same, the setting values other than the two setting values (for example, 3 to 6) are set in the second period. The rate at which setting suggestions are executed (appearance situation) may not be the same between the first period and the second period.

Further, the setting values 1 to 6 are set in the pachinko game machine 1 only in one of the variable display performance executed in the first period and the variable display performance executed in the second period. Regardless of which value is set, the ratio (appearance situation) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period The ratio (appearance situation) at which the setting suggestions are executed may be the same.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times, the special effect execution means It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period) , the part that executes the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times, the special effect execution means It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 is executed at a different rate in the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of a plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-22 as the second embodiment, variable Regarding the effect during display, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the effect during variable display executed during the second period is set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes the reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
More specifically, when any of the set values 1 to 6 is set, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set Depending on the setting value that is set in the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9 at a different rate, and the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any period other than the above can be set as long as it is a period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of Normal Reach, the second period is from the start to the end of Super Reach, or the first period is from the start of Normal Reach or Super Reach, and the second period is Normal Reach. Or until the end of the super reach, the variation pattern temporarily stops the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then resumes the variable display, so that one variable display is simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous variation pattern with a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like variable display, the first period is the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is the start timing of the second re-variable display, etc. , may correspond to the re-variable display period.

(Example 3)
In the second embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and if the effect during variable display is the same number of times, reach regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The form which determines execution of an advance notice and execution of a setting suggestion in the same ratio was illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. In the case of making it possible to execute times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 even if the same number of times of variable display effects are performed. You may

Incidentally, when the execution of the effect during variable display is determined, as shown in FIGS. Execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at the same ratio with the effect during the variable display executed in .

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-28 and 11-29, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 5% to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2%. , pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35% advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 35%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 40% advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 40%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 45% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined at a rate of 47% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and a rate of 3%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 3.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. 4. Effect types (effect patterns) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period are determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%; Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 50%, pattern PT at a rate of 5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {suggestion of setting (high)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 55% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5% advance notice (high)}.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 and 11-31, when paying attention to the case where the variation pattern is super reach, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 17.5%, pattern PT at a rate of 17.5% -9 {reach notice (high)} is determined. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 30% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {Suggestion of setting (low)} is determined, and at a rate of 1.2%, pattern PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 20% The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. , Pattern PT5 ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 1.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 22.5% Pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 22.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 2.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 40 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, 2% determined to be one of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 25% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%; 5% decided to pattern PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 45% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {Suggestion to set (low)}, 3.5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion to set (high)}, 27.5% At a rate of 27.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 27.5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , Pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} determined at a rate of 5%, 50 % to determine the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Suggestion of setting (low)}, 5% of patterns PT5 to PT-8 {Suggestion of setting (high)}, 30% of pattern PT-8 {Reach advance notice (low)} is decided, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%; At a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55% Pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when execution of the effect during variable display is determined, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, during the first period Patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of set value (low) or suggestion of setting (high)} are determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the second period, and the variable display executed in the second period. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type of the medium effect is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period and in the second period The rate at which pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the same manner is set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the ready-to-win announcement is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second set value. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {suggestion of setting value (low) or suggestion of setting value (high)} are determined as the effect type differs depending on when the setting value (for example, setting value 6) is set. , 1st set value or 2nd set value, the appearance state of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period is changed, so that the performance during variable display can be suppressed from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period, a pattern is used as the effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. The ratio of PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is reduced, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( high)} is determined. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with high setting values (for example, 5, 6), the setting suggestions are higher than when the pachinko game machine 1 is set with low setting values (for example, 1 to 4). is difficult to execute, it is difficult for a player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment as well, the pattern PT-9 is used as the effect type for the during-variable-display effect executed in the second period rather than the during-variable-display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {suggestion of setting (high)} is determined is set high. In other words, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the ready-to-reach notice based on the pattern PT-9, so that the player's expectation for the effect during the variable display being executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. can be made

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-27, even if the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, during the variable display executed in the first period The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined is the same between the effect and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, Pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined in the same form, but the present invention is not limited to this. , even if the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {Set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be different, pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} may be determined differently.

In the third embodiment, the effects during variable display are the same when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion is exemplified by the ratio, the present invention is not limited to this. The setting suggestion may be executed at a different rate as the effect during the variable display depending on whether the effect during the variable display is executed. By doing so, the ratio (appearance rate) at which setting suggestions are executed changes between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the first period (the first variable display during the effect) and the variable display during the second period. When the ready-to-win notice is executed as a middle effect (second variable display-in-time effect), an example is shown in which the ready-to-win notice is executed at a different rate according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the reach notice is executed as (second variable display effect), the reach notice is given at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 if the same number of variable display effect is performed. may be executed. By doing so, if the performance during the variable display is the same number of times, the rate at which the ready-to-win notice is executed (appearance situation) does not change according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. , the player can be made to expect the execution of the ready-to-win notice without change between the performance during variable display executed in the first period and the performance during variable display executed in the second period.

(Sixth invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following sixth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed multiple times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion that can execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When executing the predetermined effect in a first number of times out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect in a second number of times after the first number of times out of a plurality of times, the predetermined effect in the specific mode is executed. It is possible to execute at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and The part where the setting suggestions are executed at the same rate as in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be similarly expected.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 11-27) as the medium production, the variable display medium production executed in the first period and the variable display medium production executed in the second period are set. Players can similarly expect suggestions to be implemented.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 is executed at the same rate when executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, A pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the second period after the first period is a special pattern rather than the effect during the variable display in the first period. The part that executes a high percentage of reach announcements based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
In addition, in the third embodiment, if non-execution can be determined, it is possible to make the execution ratio of the reach announcement different between the first period and the second period while making the execution ratio of the setting suggestion the same.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Seventh invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following seventh invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Predetermined effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a predetermined effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes) setting suggestion based on, or a part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion where the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect),
When the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set and when the second setting value different from the first setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, a plurality of times. Among them, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the specific mode at a different rate in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. If executed, the part that can execute setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 at different rates according to the set values)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on whether the first set value or the second set value is set, the state of appearance of the predetermined performance of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes, so that the predetermined performance can be suppressed from becoming monotonous. .
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 to 11-31, depending on which one of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period. Since the setting suggestion execution ratio (appearance situation) changes between when the middle effect is executed and when the variable display during effect is executed in the second period, the player can obtain not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the setting value according to the appearance situation of the setting suggestion in .

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times, the special effect execution means It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period The part that can execute the reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate as the case where the effect during variable display is executed in the period)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect a first time out of a plurality of times, and when executing the predetermined effect a second time later than the first time out of the plurality of times, the special effect execution means It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, Part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, Regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the case where the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period , regardless of the set value, the part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.
More specifically, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 6, the state of appearance of the reach notice is the same, so it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the state of appearance of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and the effect control CPU 120 is the second period Part that executes the reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value when executing the effect during variable display)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Example 4)
In Example 2 and Example 3 of the characterizing portion 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display. and the second period each based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value to determine whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion, but the present invention is not limited to this, for the first period determines whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, reach notice and setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and set value It may be determined which one is to be executed, that is, whether to execute the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period based on different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 as a fourth embodiment, the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the normal reach effect are targeted for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach. A performance during variable display can be executed in a second period after one period. It should be noted that the non-reach and small hit variation patterns require a short variable display time to execute the effect during variable display two or more times. is limited to

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, if the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period, For the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the variation pattern. 11-33, the processing for determining effect during variable display in the fourth embodiment will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 11-33, in the process of determining effects during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies a variation pattern (103SGS311). The variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. Next, determine whether the specified variation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), proceed to 103SG313 in the case of normal reach or super reach, and if other than normal reach or super reach, that is, non-reach or small hit variation pattern In this case, since it is not subject to the effect during variable display, the process for determining the effect during variable display is terminated.

In 103SGS312, when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the setting values stored in the RAM 102 are read to specify the current setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the setting value specified in 103SGS313, whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined in a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown) ( common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), in 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display effect execution determination table common to normal reach or super reach, and uses reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on either Specifically, when the set value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, determines setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and non-execution at a rate of 10%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set It is set such that the larger the value, the higher the setting suggestion execution ratio and the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-35, focusing on the determination ratio of the effect type during variable display in the first period, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed at the rate of 20% is decided to be non-execution, and the ratio of 39% is decided to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}. Then, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} are determined at a rate of 1%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

40. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 18%; Pattern PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 8%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.2%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

43. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 15%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 1.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 12.5%, Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 45.5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

45. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 10%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 3.5%, At a rate of 40%, the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 40% to determine the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 11-33, in 103SGS314, it is determined whether or not execution of the variable display effect in the first period has been determined (103SGS315). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and an effect execution determination flag during variable display indicating that execution of the effect during variable display in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317), Go to 103SGS318. If execution is not determined at 103SGS315, that is, if non-execution is determined, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the normal reach (103SGS318), and when it is determined as the normal reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, the second Whether or not to execute the effect during variable display during the period and the type of effect (effect pattern) in the case of execution are determined using a not shown effect execution determination table during variable display (for normal reach) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 11-34(B), at 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 uses the variable display effect execution determination table for normal reach to determine any of reach advance notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, in the case of the set value 1, determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and does not execute at a rate of 5%. Decide on a percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-36, focusing on the case of normal reach for the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 determines that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion ( Decided to pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, decided to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, At a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the production type (production pattern) of the production during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 8%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

32. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestions (low)} are determined at a rate of 5%, patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestions (high)} are determined at a rate of 2.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 3%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

30. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the type of effect (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%; Pattern PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) during the variable display to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 6%, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 55% , the pattern PT-8 {reach advance notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the variation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, the super reach, based on the specified variation pattern and the set value, whether or not to execute the effect during the variable display in the second period, and the execution The type of effect (effect pattern) to be used is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 11-34(C), at 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach to determine any of reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution. . Specifically, in the case of the set value 1 and the set value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute do not decide Although the execution ratio corresponding to the setting values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and setting suggestion are determined by a common execution ratio regardless of the setting value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( High) is set so that the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-36, focusing on the case of super ready-to-win with respect to the determination ratio of the notice effect type during variable display in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In the case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is determined at a rate of 36% to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and 4% Decided to pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-9 {at a rate of 55% reach notice (high)}.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 4.2%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is changed from pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)} decided, 5% of the pattern PT5 ~ pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} determined, 5% of the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-1 at a rate of 33.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a rate of 6.5%, pattern PT-8 {reach Advance notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {Reach advance notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the setting value set in the pachinko machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)} decided, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 8%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 5% }, and the pattern PT-9 {reach advance notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 11-33, in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320, it is determined whether or not execution of the effect during variable display in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 to PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and a variable display effect execution determination flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323 ), ending the effect during variable display. If execution is not determined in 103SGS321, that is, if non-execution is determined, the effect during variable display is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the set value is 1 to 6, and when executing the effect during variable display in the second period, it is determined whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Determine reach warnings or setting suggestions based on separate decision tables. That is, since the criteria for determining which of the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion are to be executed are different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the production during variable display from becoming monotonous.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the first period, while the reach announcement is made in the second period Since it is easier to execute, setting suggestions will not be likely to be executed in both the first period and the second period, even though it will be normal reach or super reach in the second period, and Since the reach advance notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

In addition, since the execution ratio of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution ratio of the reach notice in the first period, the reach notice is executed in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to suppress the middle production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 11-35 to 11-37, focusing on each setting value, when executing the effect during variable display in the first period, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 Execution of the reach notice is determined at the same rate (40%), and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. It is determined by the same ratio (60%). For this reason, regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1, in the effect during variable display executed in the first period and the effect during variable display executed in the second period, The player's attention can be drawn in the same way.

Also, even if the setting value is high (for example, setting value 5, 6, etc.), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion in the second period, but the super reach In this case, since the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation for the big win from being lowered.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than the case where the setting suggestion is decided in the first period, so the setting suggestion in the super reach is executed, the player's expectations for the high setting can be heightened.

In addition, in the first period, when the setting value is 1, execution of the reach notice and setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the setting value is 6, that is, when the setting values are 1, 2, The higher the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestions than the reach notice. easier to predict.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time) and in the second period. Although the execution of the ready-to-reach notice is determined at a different rate between when the effect during variable display (the effect during variable display for the second time) is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the execution of the ready-to-win notice at the same ratio between when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period and when the effect during variable display is executed in the second period. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the ready-to-win announcement in the same manner in the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 11-34, if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the ready-to-win notice is executed at the same rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Although the mode of determination is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the effect during the variable display of the same number of times, execution of the reach notice according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be determined in different proportions. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the execution of the same effect type in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect is monotonous. can prevent it from becoming

(8th invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following eighth invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result is a big hit by changing the set value, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, for example. There was a thing that can change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of displayed animal. However, since no consideration is given to how the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first and second times of the plurality of times, there is a problem that the effect may become inappropriate. . Therefore, with the object of providing a gaming machine that can prevent the performance from becoming inappropriate,
The game machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player, and set to one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win" in the variable pattern setting process of S111). A part that determines one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not);
Variable display means capable of executing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect process during variable display, displays the decorative pattern based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. the part that performs variable display) and
Predetermined effect determination means for determining one of a plurality of effect modes of a predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, patterns PT-1 to PT-9 are selected as the effect pattern of the variable display effect. ), and
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as effect during variable display Setting suggestion, or part that can execute reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
with
The effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode that suggests control to the advantageous state (for example, a ready-to-reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern), and a suggestion about setting. a specific aspect (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which are specific patterns),
The predetermined effect execution means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-32 as a fourth embodiment, a portion that can execute the variable display effect in the first period and the second period before starting the ready-to-win effect ),
Based on at least the set value that is set, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control A part where the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value that is set in the variable display effect in the first period),
Based on at least the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times among the plurality of times is determined (for example, in the embodiment 4, as shown in FIG. 11-33, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the effect during variable display based on the set value and the variation pattern set in the effect during variable display in the second period. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect are different between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-33, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the first period (the effect during variable display for the first time), the effect during variable display is determined based on the variation pattern of the variable display. Determines the effect type of the effect * Isn't it a set value? (Refer to 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the effect during variable display in the second period (the effect during variable display for the second time), the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko game machine 1 Based on the value, the type of effect during variable display is determined (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). That is, since the criteria for determining the type of effect are different between the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect, the first variable-display effect and the second variable-display effect are different. , the execution of the same effect type is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at the same rate when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times ( For example, the production control CPU 120 executes the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 in the case where the variable display production is executed in the first period and the case where the variable display production is executed in the second period. parts that run at the same rate)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode is executed the first number of times or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special mode at different ratios when executing the predetermined effect in the first number of times and when executing the predetermined effect in the second number of times (for example, 11-34 as a fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the effect during variable display in the second period, and the pattern PT -8 or the part that executes reach notices based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a first set value among the plurality of set values and a second set value different from the first set value. 2 setting value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at the same rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 When executing the effect during variable display during the period, regardless of the set value that is set, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate, and the effect control CPU 120 is the first Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at the same rate regardless of the set value when executing variable display production in 2 periods)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times does not change regardless of the set value, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined effect executing means, when executing the predetermined effect at a predetermined number of times out of the plurality of times, sets a second set value different from the first set value among the plurality of set values when the first set value is set. When the set value is set, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed at a different rate (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period, it is set A part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a different rate according to the set value that is set, and when the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the variable display in the second period. Part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the state of appearance of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the first period, regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, a form of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the setting value is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the variation pattern, it is determined whether to execute setting suggestion or reach notice only according to the set value. may

In addition, in the second period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is not limited to this Instead, in the second period, depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, reach notice and setting suggestion may be determined at the same rate.

In addition, in the present embodiment 4, in the second period, the form of determining whether to execute reach notice or setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach was exemplified, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may make it determine whether.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the characterizing portion 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. A mode in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period from the timing to the start timing of the normal reach effect and the second period after the first period has been exemplified, but the present invention is this. However, the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decoration pattern during the variable display of the decoration pattern and then resuming the variable display, one variable display is pseudo-variably displayed a plurality of times. It may be executed at the timing according to the re-variation of the decoration pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect that looks like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-38 as a modification 2, for all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach/small hit, normal reach and super reach, from the start timing of variable display to the start timing of normal reach reach production a first period before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, a second period after the first period and corresponding to a re-variable display period after the first temporary stop of the decoration pattern, The effect during variable display can be executed in the third period which is after the second period and corresponds to the re-variable display period after the temporary stop of the decoration pattern for the third time.

In addition, in this modification 2, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decoration pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first period. Executed according to the re-variable display at the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second period is executed according to the re-variable display at the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the third period is executed according to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. It may be executed according to the re-variable display.

In this modification 2, in the above-described effect determination process during variable display, for the first period, regardless of which variation pattern, any one of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 , and for the second period and the third period, variable display based on the set value only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach A process for determining the type of presentation is executed.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the variation pattern (does not determine execution of the reach notice). It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the second period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and execution of setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, execution of reach notice is decided at a rate of 100%, and execution of setting suggestion is not decided. It should be noted that the higher the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the setting suggestion (high) execution ratio.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period By setting the ratio of determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the effect during variable display is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period or the second period is performed. When executing the effect during variable display in three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. In other words, since the determination criteria for the performance control CPU 120 to determine the performance mode of the predetermined performance are different between the first period, the second period, and the third period, it is possible to prevent the performance during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a variation pattern in which the degree of expectation for a big hit increases as the number of times of re-variable display increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, and so on. Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second re-variable In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is also the possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice, and the third re-variable In the third period corresponding to the display, the variation pattern is highly likely to be super reach, so the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

In this way, in the case of a variation pattern involving one or two pseudo-continuous performances, it is possible to suggest settings while suppressing the decrease in the reliability of the ready-to-win announcement due to frequent occurrence of the ready-to-win announcement. On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's expectation for the big win due to frequent occurrence of setting suggestion in the case of the variation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous performances.

In addition, in the second modification, in the first period in which the reliability of the jackpot is the lowest, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, rather than the reach notice, so the setting suggestion is preferable. On the other hand, in the second and third periods in which the reliability of the jackpot is higher than in the first period, the reach notice is set according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Since the decision is made with priority, the player's expectation for the big win can be favorably increased.

In addition, in this modified example 2, in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a rate of 100%, but in the first period, the execution of setting suggestions is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice. If there is, it does not have to be the one that determines the execution of setting suggestions at a rate of 100%. Also, in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice, but the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Also, in the third period, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified at a rate of 100%, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, the reach notice It does not have to be a 100% decision on execution.

Further, in this modification 2, in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion according to the set value is determined with priority over the reach notice, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern exemplifies a form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined with priority over the setting suggestion according to whether is normal reach or super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, the first period and the second period , regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the set value with priority over the reach notice, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach may be determined with priority over the setting suggestions.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined according to the setting value with priority over the reach notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of In the first number of times (e.g., the first period or the second period), at least if the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the setting value, the setting suggestion or according to the setting value and the fluctuation pattern You may make it determine reach notice.

In addition, in the present modification 2, in the second period and the third period, according to the setting value and the variation pattern, the execution of the reach notice is exemplified prior to the setting suggestion, but the present invention is to this It is not limited, and in the second number of times (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number of times among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or the reach notice may be determined according to the setting value and the variation pattern.

In addition, in the second to fourth embodiments, as an effect during the variable display executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is made by setting the rate at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined to be higher than the rate at which the ready-to-reach notice is determined. Although a form in which priority is given to execution is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As for the effect, the setting suggestion may be preferentially determined according to the order of the processing for determining the effect type.

Further, in Embodiments 2 to 4, as the effect during the variable display executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined is set higher than the rate at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although a form in which priority is given to execution is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. As an effect, execution of the ready-to-win announcement may be preferentially determined according to the order of processing for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the effects during variable display can be executed multiple times in one variable display. It may be executable over the variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 suspends and stores information (for example, display results (including jackpot types), random numbers for determining variation patterns, etc.) related to variable display whose execution is suspended when a starting prize is generated. , and the display result and the fluctuation pattern are prefetched and determined based on the extracted random value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as the effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 If it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that predicts the reliability of the big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended), the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the pending memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice A reach notice or a setting suggestion may be executed as a pre-read notice for the target change over a plurality of times of variable display until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 variably displays the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 during the variable display effect at predetermined timings. A form of executing the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the middle production determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the images will be destroyed and dropped has been exemplified, but the present invention has been described. is not limited to this, and when the player's operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 changes at a timing corresponding to the operation. You can let it run.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player in the variable display effect as described above, the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation valid period of the push button 31B is performed. An operation prompting image (for example, a character image or a button image that says “Continue hitting!”) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect.

Further, when the push sensor 35B detects a specific action of operating the push button 31B during the operation effective period of the push button 31B, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is being operated, an effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying and dropping the paraglider) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B was not detected. In some cases, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be ended without performing reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, a player who knows the specific action can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, as an operation promoting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B during the effective period of operation of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the operation promoting effect is executed by emitting light from a light-emitting part built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific action or the player who has noticed the light emission can see the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state indication result, a form is exemplified in which a reach notice that suggests the possibility of becoming a reach is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the predetermined effects that result in an advantageous state suggesting result include a stop pattern notice suggesting which pattern the variable display pattern will stop at, a character notice that a character will appear, and a step in which the notice image changes step by step. Various advance notice effects can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects suggesting the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance notice, a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area, and the like.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display has a common effect period common to the reach notice and the setting suggestion. It does not have a period to perform) It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the ready-to-win announcement and the setting suggestion with different presentation modes are executed together in the same period (at the same timing), the ready-to-win announcement may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the advance notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion different from the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by, for example, making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image, or by differentiating the display mode such as the emission color, brightness, contrast, etc. is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers, and the setting When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn on the second drawing layer which is lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn on the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer on the image display device 5 are drawn. When the first effect image is overlapped and displayed on the second effect image, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image. By doing so, it is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. Furthermore, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is set higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance of the second effect image (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is also possible to execute the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound modes such as the volume and quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. , that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement may be more audible than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of enhancing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only increasing the volume of the sound effect, but also decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM to increase the audibility. good too. It should be noted that there are cases where the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Furthermore, when the production control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the production sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any one of the reproduction channels , for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the ready-to-win notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. In addition, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (the first reproduction channel and the second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel The audibility of the first effect sound is made higher than the audibility of the second effect sound by making the volume and sound quality different from (improving) the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel, It is also possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

In addition, by changing the light emission mode such as the color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 between the ready-to-win notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light-emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win notice is changed to the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. In other words, the light emission mode corresponding to the reach advance notice may be made more visible than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. In addition, the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off in response to the setting suggestion.

In other words, when the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, the production result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In addition to increasing the execution ratio of the reach notice in the case, when the production result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the production mode such as the display, sound, and light of the reach notice is higher than the production mode of the setting suggestion Including priority etc. Furthermore, executing the ready-to-win notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, sound , light, and movement of movable bodies.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion indicates which of the setting values 1 to 6 is set as the setting suggestion in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be, for example, the possibility that the setting value has been changed or the possibility that the setting value has not been changed (deferred).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state advantageous to the player has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. High base state (time saving state) where conditions are likely to be established, high probability game state (high probability state) with high probability of becoming a jackpot game state, high probability low base state (latent probability variable state), special reach state (for example , super reach, etc.), including a state where the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on a big hit variation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

In the slot machine, a state that is advantageous to the player means a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the probability of winning a small combination, or a state in which an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is announced (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), and a state in which an advantageous operation mode for the player is notified and the probability of winning a replay combination increases (for example, ART (Assist Replay Time) state).

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed in a slot machine, a special combination such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not complete and the special combination is carried over. Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols will be derived and displayed, and setting suggestions suggesting the setting value set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (variable display multiple times), or AT state It is possible to execute over a plurality of games (multiple times of variable display) from the time an ART state is won until the AT state or ART state is started.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 097IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 097IW will be described.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 097IW. Among them, FIG. 12A shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for loss. Also, FIG. 12-1(B) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for big wins. As shown in FIG. 12-1(A), in this example, in the case of a loss, one of the variation patterns PA1 to PA5 is determined as the variation pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1(B), in this example, when a big win is achieved, any one of the variation patterns PB2 to PB5 is determined as the variation pattern.

In this example, the variation pattern PA1 is a variation pattern that designates normal variation. Also, the variation patterns PA2 and PB2 are variation patterns that designate execution of normal reach during the variable display of decorative symbols. Also, the variation patterns PA3 and PB3 are variation patterns that designate execution of Super Reach A during the variation display of decorative symbols. Also, the variation patterns PA4 and PB4 are variation patterns that designate execution of Super Reach B during the variable display of decorative symbols. Also, the variation patterns PA5 and PB5 are variation patterns that designate execution of Super Reach C during the variable display of decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-1, when super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) is executed, expectations for a big hit are higher than when normal reach is executed reliability (reliability) is high. In addition, among the three types of super reach, when super reach C is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is the highest, and when super reach B is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is second. It is high, and the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is the lowest when Super Reach A is executed. Therefore, in this example, the normal reach and the super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) are directed to indicate whether or not a big hit will occur, and which type of reach is executed. The degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit differs depending on the number.

Next, the operation of the production control means (production control CPU 120) will be described.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-2 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 097IWS101). Next, the effect control CPU 120 is the variation pattern command (effect control command specifying the variation pattern) read in step 097IWS 101, and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command ( The display result (stopped pattern) of the decoration pattern is determined according to the production control command for designating whether or not it is a big win, whether it is a small win or not, and the type of the big win (step 097 IWS 102). That is, by executing the processing of step 097IWS102 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 097IWS102, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the hit is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

In step 097 IWS 102, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120, as a stop symbol, the decorative pattern in which three symbols are the same probability variation pattern (for example, an odd number pattern). Decide on a combination. In addition, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are the same non-variable patterns (for example, even-numbered patterns) as stop patterns. to decide. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, a small hit design (for example, a combination of "135" designs) is determined as the stop design. Also, when the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance-up effect setting process for setting the presence and type of the chance-up effect during super reach (step 097IWS103). In this example, the "chance-up effect" is a effect that is executed in such a manner that the expectation for the big win is further heightened (the chance is increased) during execution of the super reach.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the chance-up effect if the variation pattern and execution of the chance-up effect have been determined (step 097IWS104). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 097IWS105).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set.

In addition, in particular, in the case of a variation pattern (variation patterns PA3 to PA5, PB3 to PB5) with super reach A to C, a process table including super reach A to C is selected in step 097IWS 104, and the selected By executing step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the effect processing during variable display (step S172) according to the process table, super reach AC is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Further, when super reach A to C are executed, if execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the chance-up effect setting process of step 097IWS103, a process table including the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104, According to the selected process table, step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the effect processing during variable display (step S172) are executed, so that super reach A to C are executed while the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the chance increases. A performance is performed.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 097IWS106).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 097IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decoration pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 097IWS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 097IWS108), and terminates the variable display start setting process.

(Chance up production setting process)
FIG. 12-3 is a flow chart showing the chance-up effect setting process (step 097IWS103). In the chance-up effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA3, PB3) including super reach A (step 097 IWS201 ). If it is a variation pattern including super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table A as a table for determining the presence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS202). Then, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS207.

If it is not a variation pattern including super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA4, PB4) including super reach B ( Step 097 IWS 203). If it is a variation pattern including super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table B as a table for determining the presence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS204). Then, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS207.

If it is not a variation pattern including super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA5, PB5) including super reach C ( step 097 IWS 205). If it is a variation pattern including super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table C as a table for determining the presence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS206). Then, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS207.

If the variation pattern does not include super reach C (N in step 097 IWS205), that is, if the variation pattern includes non-reach loss or normal reach, the chance-up effect setting process is terminated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the chance-up effect determination table selected in steps 097IWS202, S204 and S206 to perform lottery processing based on random numbers to determine the presence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS207).

12-4 to 12-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the chance-up effect determination table. Among them, FIG. 12-4 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table A selected at step 097IWS202. FIG. 12-5 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table B selected at step 097IWS204. FIG. 12-6 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table C selected at step 097IWS206.

First, the chance-up effect determination table A (chance-up effect determination table for super reach A) will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4. As shown in FIG. 12-4, in the chance-up effect determination table A, judgment values are assigned to no chance-up effect and chance-up effect A1 to A7.

As shown in FIG. 12-4, in this example, when super reach A is executed, in principle four images of image A1, image A2, image A3 and image A4 are generated during execution of super reach A. displayed in order. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-4, these images A1, A2, A3 and A4 are basically displayed in white, blue, green or red. Among these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images A1, A2, A3, and A4 are displayed in white, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images A1, A2, A3, and A4 are displayed in blue, green, and red, chances are up. This corresponds to a state in which a production is being executed. Therefore, in this example, when the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach A, the expectation for the big win is further increased (the chance is increased).

In this example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 displayed during super reach A, image B1, image B2, and image B3 displayed during super reach B to be described later, and super reach to be described later. The image C1 and the image C2 displayed during the reach C are also referred to as chance-up images.

As shown in FIG. 12-4, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects A1 to A7 for the chance-up effects to be executed during the super ready-to-win A. The “chance-up effect A1” is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a blue display color. The "chance-up effect A2" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in green. The "chance-up effect A3" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 12-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect A1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect A3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect A2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and when each chance-up image is displayed in green. has the next highest level of expectation (reliability) for the big win, and the chance-up image displayed in blue has the lowest level of expectation (reliability) for the big win (however, each chance-up image is displayed in white). The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when it is displayed).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-4, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. The “chance up effect A4” is a chance up effect in which the image A1 and the image A2 are displayed in blue color, and then the image A3 and image A4 are displayed in green color. In the "chance up effect A5", the image A1 and the image A2 are displayed in blue color, then the image A3 is displayed in green color, and the image A4 is displayed in red color. It is an up performance. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. ) is displayed in a low display color, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for the chance-up image that will be displayed after that.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color changes from a display color with a high degree of expectation (reliability) for a big win to a display color with a low degree of expectation (reliability). (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged after his expectation for the big win has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of super reach A to super reach C, but a common chance up image is displayed for super reach A and super reach B. may occur. "Chance-up effect A6" is a chance-up effect in which image X that can be displayed in common with super reach B is displayed instead of image A1, and then image A2, image A3 and image A4 are displayed in order. In this example, when the common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image A2, image A3, image A4) is displayed in rainbow display colors. By displaying in such a rainbow display color different from blue, green, and red, it is possible for the player to recognize that the common mode image is displayed as the chance-up image.

In this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in rainbow color, the expectation for the big win is further increased (chance is increased), so the display color in rainbow color also corresponds to the special mode.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-4, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The “chance up effect A7” is a chance up effect in which the image A1, the image A2 and the image A3 are displayed in white color and then the image A4 is displayed in red color. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when a big win is achieved. There is no allocation of values, and the jackpot is determined. With such a configuration, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation.

Next, the chance-up effect determination table B (chance-up effect determination table for super reach B) will be described with reference to FIG. 12-5. As shown in FIG. 12-5, in the chance-up effect determination table B, judgment values are assigned to no chance-up effect and chance-up effect B1 to B7, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 12-5, in this example, when super reach B is executed, in principle, three images of image B1, image B2 and image B3 are displayed in order during execution of super reach B. be. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-5, these images B1, B2 and B3 are basically displayed in one of white, blue, green or red display colors. Among these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images B1, B2 and B3 are displayed in white, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green and red correspond to special modes, and when these images B1, B2 and B3 are displayed in blue, green and red, a chance-up effect is executed. Equivalent to the state of Therefore, in this example, when the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach B, the expectation for the big win is further increased (the chance is increased).

As shown in FIG. 12-5, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects B1 to B7 for the chance-up effects to be executed during the super ready-to-win B. The “chance-up effect B1” is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in blue. The "chance-up effect B2" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in green. The "chance-up effect B3" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 12-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B2 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect B1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect B3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect B2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and when each chance-up image is displayed in green. has the next highest level of expectation (reliability) for the big win, and the chance-up image displayed in blue has the lowest level of expectation (reliability) for the big win (however, each chance-up image is displayed in white). The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when it is displayed).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-5, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. The “chance-up effect B4” is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in a blue display color, and then the images B2 and B3 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B5" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in a blue display color, the image B2 is displayed in a green display color, and the image B3 is displayed in a red display color. be. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red. ) is displayed in a low display color, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation for the chance-up image that will be displayed after that.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-5, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color changes from a display color with high expectation (reliability) for the big win to a low display color. (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged after his expectation for the big win has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of super reach A to super reach C, but a common chance up image is displayed for super reach A and super reach B. may occur. The “chance-up effect B6” is a chance-up effect in which an image X that can be displayed in common with the super reach A is displayed instead of the image B1, and then images B2 and B3 are displayed in order. In this example, when the common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image B2, image B3) is displayed in rainbow display colors. By displaying in such a rainbow display color different from blue, green, and red, it is possible for the player to recognize that the common mode image is displayed as the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-5, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect B7” is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 and the image B2 are displayed in white and then the image B3 is displayed in red. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is judged only when a big win is achieved. There is no allocation of values, and the jackpot is determined. With such a configuration, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation.

Next, the chance-up effect determination table C (chance-up effect determination table for super reach C) will be described with reference to FIG. 12-6. As shown in FIG. 12-6, in the chance-up effect determination table C, judgment values are assigned to no chance-up effect and chance-up effect C1 to C5.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, when super reach C is performed, two images, image C1 and image C2, are displayed in order during super reach C, in principle. Also, as shown in FIG. 12-6, these images C1 and C2 are basically displayed in any one of white, blue, green, or red display colors. Among these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images C1 and C2 are displayed in white, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to the special mode, and when these images C1 and C2 are displayed in blue, green, and red, the chance-up effect is executed. Corresponds to state. Therefore, in this example, when the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in blue, green, and red during the super reach C, the expectation for the big win is further heightened (increased chances).

As shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, there are five types of chance-up effects C1 to C5 for the chance-up effects to be executed during the super reach C. The "chance-up effect C1" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in blue. The "chance-up effect C2" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in green. The "chance-up effect C3" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in red.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect C1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect C3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is higher than when the chance-up effect C2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and when each chance-up image is displayed in green. has the next highest level of expectation (reliability) for the big win, and the chance-up image displayed in blue has the lowest level of expectation (reliability) for the big win (however, each chance-up image is displayed in white). The expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The "chance-up effect C4" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in a green display color and then the image C2 is displayed in a red display color. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image that is displayed after that may be displayed in red. Even when the chance-up image is displayed in a low display color, it is possible to have expectations for the chance-up image that will be displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color changes from a display color with a high degree of expectation (reliability) for a big win to a display color with a low degree of expectation (reliability). (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged after his expectation for the big win has increased.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect C5” is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in white and then the image C2 is displayed in red. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C5 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when a big win is achieved. There is no allocation of values, and the jackpot is determined. With such a configuration, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation.

Incidentally, in this example, using the chance-up effect determination tables A to C shown in FIGS. Although the case where it is decided by doing is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the case of executing Super Reach A, if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in one lottery process, the display color of each chance-up image (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) is changed individually. may be determined by the lottery process.

Further, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes, it is set in advance so that there is no case where the display color with high expectation (reliability) for the big win changes to a low display color (there is no case of losing the chance). Although the case where the patterns (chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4) are determined has been shown, the determination method is not limited to this. For example, when the display color of each chance-up image is determined by individual lottery processing, the chance-up image that is displayed later than the chance-up image that is displayed first is prohibited from being inferior. may be configured to perform In this case, for example, when the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed first is determined, when the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later is determined, the degree of expectation higher than or the same as the display color is determined. The display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later may be determined by performing lottery processing using a determination table that includes only display colors. Further, for example, when a display color with a lower expectation level than the chance-up image that is displayed first is determined, the determination result is discarded, and a display color with a higher level of expectation level or the same level of expectation level than that display color is selected. The process of determining the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later may be repeatedly executed until the color is determined.

Also, the types of chance-up effects are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 12-4 to 12-6. For example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), the display color changes stepwise in order of blue, green, and red. However, for example, it may be configured such that there is a pattern in which green is skipped and blue changes to red.

Further, for example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), after the chance-up image is displayed in the previous display color, A case has been shown in which the displayed chance-up image is displayed in a different display color (the display color itself of the chance-up image once displayed does not change in the middle), but such a case has been described. It is not limited to any form. For example, when executing Super Reach A, after the image A1 is displayed in blue as a chance-up image, the display color of the image A1 itself may be configured to have a pattern that changes to green or red thereafter. .

Further, in this example, when super reach A and B are executed, there is a case where the common image X is displayed as the first chance up image (chance up effects A6 and B6). Although the case where it does is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, all chance-up images displayed during super reach A and B may be displayed as a common image X, or two or three chance-up images may be displayed as a common image X. It may be configured as

In this example, the common image X is displayed only when Super Reach A and B are executed. may be configured so that there is a pattern in which is displayed.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode) and then in red (special mode) (chance-up effects A7, B7, C5), the big win is confirmed. Although the case of allocating the judgment value is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the chance-up image changes from white (normal mode) to red (special mode), it may be configured such that there is a low probability that it will be shifted.

Further, for example, the chance-up image may be configured to have a pattern that changes from white (normal mode) to blue, green, or rainbow colors as a special mode.

Further, for example, even if the chance-up image changes from blue to green or red, or from green to red, as in chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4, the big win is confirmed. It may be configured to allocate the judgment value so that there is a case to do.

Also, in this example, the case where three types of super reach A to C are configured to be executable has been shown, but this is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, four or more types of super reach can be configured to be executable. Alternatively, only two types of super reach may be configured to be executable. Also, it may be configured to provide a type of super reach in which the chance-up image is not displayed and the chance-up effect is not executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the chance-up image can be displayed up to four times during super reach has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such an aspect, and the chance-up image can be displayed five times or more. good.

As described above, various aspects can be considered as aspects of the chance-up effect.

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIG. 12-7 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 097IWS301) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 097IWS302). When the process timer times out (step 097 IWS303), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 097 IWS 304). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 097IWS305).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of Super Reach AC is being executed (step 097IWS306). If none of Super Reach A to C is in progress, go to step 097 IWS316. If any one of Super Reach A to C is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to display one of the chance-up images (step 097IWS307). If it is time to display the chance-up image, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the chance-up image to be displayed in the display color (white, blue, green, red, control to display in rainbow color) (step 097 IWS 308). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display an effect display around the chance-up image in the same display colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) as the chance-up image displayed. (Step 097 IWS309).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display color of the displayed chance-up image and effect image is white (normal mode) (step 097IWS310). If the display color is white (normal mode), the process proceeds to step 097 IWS316. If the display color is not white (normal mode) (that is, if it is a special mode), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 097IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS316.

By executing the processes of steps 097, IWS310 and S311, in this example, the notification sound is output only when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode, so that the player is aware only when the expectation for the big win is high. can be made

If it is not the display timing of the chance up image (N of step 097IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is within the operation effective period of the push button 31B (step 097IWS312). In this example, an operation effective period is provided in the second half of the performance period of each of Super Reach A to C, and if the push button 31B is pressed within the operation effective period, or the push button 31B is not operated. When the operation effective period has passed, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a win/fail result report indicating whether or not a jackpot will be achieved. In this example, the display timing of each chance-up image is provided in the first half of the effect period of each Super Reach A to C (period before the operation valid period), and each chance-up image can be displayed. This period is configured so as not to overlap with the period during which the operation valid period and the success/failure result notification can be displayed.

If it is not within the valid period of operation, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS316. If it is within the operation effective period, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the push button 31 is turned on (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input) (step 097 IWS 313 ). If the push button 31 is on, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS315.

If the push button 31 is not turned on, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to end the valid operation period (step 097IWS314). If the end timing of the operation effective period has not come, the process proceeds to step 097 IWS316. If the push button 31 is turned on (Y of step 097IWS313), or if it is the end timing of the operation valid period (Y of step 097IWS314), the effect control CPU 120 displays the result on the image display device 5. Control to display the notification is performed (step 097IWS315).

At step 097 IWS 315, the effect control CPU 120, for example, confirms the display result indicated by the display result specifying command, and if it is a big hit, performs control to display a character display such as "big hit" as a win/fail result notification. . In addition, in the case of losing, control is performed to display a character display such as "missing" as a success/failure result notification.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 097IWS316). If the variable time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 097IWS317), and terminates the effect process during variable display.

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the display timing of the chance-up image and the success/failure result notification during execution of Super Reach will be described. FIG. 12-8 is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance-up image and the success/failure result notification during execution of Super Reach. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 12-8, as an example, when super reach A is executed, chance up effect A3 is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-8, at timing T1, the image display device 5 starts to display the variable display of left, middle, and right ornamental patterns, and then at timing T2, it becomes ready-to-win establishment timing and normal ready-to-win starts. Then, after that, at timing T3, when it is time to develop to super reach, super reach A is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8, during execution of Super Reach A, image A1, image A2, image A3 and image A4 can be displayed as chance up images. As shown in FIG. 12-8, in this example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in the period T3 to T4, which is the first half of the rendering period of super reach A before the effective operation period. is possible. Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8, in this example, when the chance-up images (image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4) are displayed, effect images are also displayed at the same time. Also, the effect image is displayed in the same display color as the chance-up image. The example shown in FIG. 12-8 shows a case where each effect image is displayed in red in response to each chance-up image being displayed in red.

FIG. 12-8 is an example. When each chance amplifier image is displayed in green, the effect image is also displayed in green, and when each chance amplifier image is displayed in blue, the effect image is also displayed. When each chance amplifier image is displayed in blue, the effect image is also displayed in rainbow color, and when each chance amplifier image is displayed in white (normal mode), the effect image is also displayed. Displayed in white (normal mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8, in the latter half of the rendering period of Super Reach A, for example, the valid operation period starts from timing T4, and if the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected within the valid operation period, The display of the win/fail result notification is started at the timing (timing T5) when the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected. If the push button 31B is not operated within the valid period of operation, display of the success/failure result is started at the end of the valid period of operation. Then, when the fluctuation time ends (timing T6), the variable display of the decoration design is finished, and the stop design of the decoration design is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5 .

In this example, the display of the win/fail result notification is started at the end of the valid period of operation when the operation is not performed. may be configured not to display the winning/failing result notification.

As shown in FIG. 12-8, in this example, it is possible to display a chance-up image and an effect image in the first half of the Super Reach execution period, and it is possible to display the win/fail result notification in the latter half of the period. be. In addition, in the production of the second half period, it is restricted so as not to display the chance-up image and the effect image. Therefore, the player's attention can be focused on the success/fail result notification.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8, the chance-up image and the effect image can be displayed only in the first half of the Super Reach execution period, and the win/fail result is announced in the latter half of the performance. Although the case of being designed in advance to be able to display is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, regardless of the timing during the execution period of Super Reach, it is possible to display the chance-up image and the effect image, and when the display timing of the chance-up image and the effect image comes, the operation valid period It may be configured to perform a prohibition process so as not to display the chance-up image or the effect image when the middle or winning/fail result notification is being displayed.

Further, for example, instead of not displaying the chance-up image or the effect image at all during the operation valid period or while the success/fail result notification is being displayed, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed at an extremely low rate. . Further, for example, during the effective period of operation or during the display of the success/fail result notification, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed in an inconspicuous display mode such as reducing the display size. It is sufficient that the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted in some form.

(Example of Super Reach production)
Next, the effect mode of Super Reach will be described. FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of super ready-to-win effects. Among them, FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 show a specific example of the effect mode of super reach A accompanied by the chance-up effect. Also, FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12 show a specific example of the effect mode of super reach B accompanied by the chance-up effect. Also, FIGS. 12-13 and 12-14 show a specific example of the effect mode of super reach A without the chance-up effect. Also, FIGS. 12-15 and 12-16 show a specific example of the effect mode of super reach B without the chance-up effect. In FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . .

First, with reference to FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, the effect mode of super reach A accompanied by the chance-up effect will be described. Incidentally, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, as an example, a case where it is decided to execute the chance-up effect A3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-9(A), the image display device 5 performs variable display of left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and as shown in FIG. 12-9(B), left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-win state. Next, it is time to develop to Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 12-9(C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach A rush" are displayed as the character's words. A display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-9(C), when Super Reach A is started, the variable display of the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when it comes time to display the image A1, as shown in FIG. 12D, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW12 simulating a bird as the image A1. Further, since execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, the wing portion of the bird is displayed in red in the image 097IW12 as shown in FIG. 12-9(D) (see step 097IWS308). . Further, as shown in FIG. 12-9(D), the effect image 097IW13 is displayed in red around the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes time to display the image A2, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW14 simulating a bird different from the image A1 as the image A2, as shown in FIG. 12-10(E). Further, since execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been determined, as shown in FIG. 12-10(E), the wing portion of the bird is displayed in red in the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS308). . Also, as shown in FIG. 12-10(E), the effect image 097IW15 is displayed in red around the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes time to display the image A3, as shown in FIG. 12-10(F), an image 097IW16 imitating a bird different from the images A1 and A2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the image A3. . Further, since execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been determined, as shown in FIG. 12-10(F), the wing portion of the bird is displayed in red in the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS308). . Also, as shown in FIG. 12-10(F), the effect image 097IW17 is displayed in red around the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes time to display the image A4, as shown in FIG. 12G, the image display device 5 displays, as the image A4, an image 097IW18 imitating a bird different from the images A1, A2, and A3. Is displayed. Further, since execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been determined, as shown in FIG. 12-10(G), the wing portion of the bird is displayed in red in the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS308). . Also, as shown in FIG. 12-10(G), an effect image 097IW19 is displayed in red around the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12, the effect mode of super reach B accompanied by the chance-up effect will be described. Incidentally, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12, as an example, the case where execution of the chance-up effect B3 is determined will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the image display device 5 performs variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and as shown in FIG. 12-11(B), the left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-win state. Next, when it is time to develop into Super Reach B, a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. A display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-11(C), when Super Reach B is started, the variable display of the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when it comes time to display the image B1, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW22 simulating the moon as the image B1, as shown in FIG. 12D. Also, since execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, the moon is displayed in red in the image 097IW22 as shown in FIG. 12-11(D) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-11(D), the effect image 097IW23 is displayed in red around the image 097IW22 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes time to display the image B2, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW24 imitating Jupiter as the image B2, as shown in FIG. 12-12(E). Further, since execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Jupiter is displayed in red in the image 097IW24 as shown in FIG. 12-12(E) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-12(E), the effect image 097IW25 is displayed in red around the image 097IW24 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes time to display the image B3, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW26 simulating Saturn as the image B3, as shown in FIG. 12-12(F). Also, since execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Saturn is displayed in red in the image 097IW26 as shown in FIG. 12-12(F) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-12(F), the effect image 097IW27 is displayed in red around the image 097IW26 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special manner, notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12-13 and 12-14, the effect mode of super reach A without the chance-up effect will be described. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-13 and 12-14, it is assumed that it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect. As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), the image display device 5 performs variable display of left, middle and right decorative patterns, and as shown in FIG. 12-13(B), left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-win state. Next, it is time to develop into Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 12-13(C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Enter Super Reach A" are displayed as the character's words. A display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-13(C), when Super Reach A is started, the variable display of the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when it comes time to display the image A1, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW32 simulating a bird as the image A1, as shown in FIG. 12D. Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in the image 097IW32 as shown in FIG. 12-13(D) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-13(D), an effect image 097IW33 is displayed in white around the image 097IW32 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when it is time to display the image A2, an image 097IW34 imitating a bird different from the image A1 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the image A2, as shown in FIG. 12-14(E). Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in the image 097IW34 as shown in FIG. 12-14(E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 12-14(E), an effect image 097IW35 is displayed in white around the image 097IW34 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when it comes time to display the image A3, as shown in FIG. 12-14(F), an image 097IW36 imitating a bird different from the images A1 and A2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the image A3. . Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in the image 097IW36 as shown in FIG. 12-14(F) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-14(F), the effect image 097IW37 is displayed in white around the image 097IW36 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when it comes time to display the image A4, as shown in FIG. 12G, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW38 imitating a bird different from the images A1, A2, and A3 as the image A4. Is displayed. Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in white in the image 097IW38 as shown in FIG. 12-14(G) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-14(G), an effect image 097IW39 is displayed in white around the image 097IW38 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 12-15 and 12-16, a description will be given of the effect mode of super ready-to-win B without the chance-up effect. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-15 and 12-16, it is assumed that it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect. As shown in FIG. 12-15(A), the image display device 5 performs variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, and as shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the left and right decorative patterns are the same. The symbol (in this example, symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to enter the ready-to-win state. Next, when it is time to develop into Super Reach B, a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. A display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-15(C), when Super Reach B is started, the variable display of the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when it comes time to display the image B1, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW42 simulating the moon as the image B1, as shown in FIG. 12D. Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the moon is displayed in white in the image 097IW42 as shown in FIG. 12-15(D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 12-15(D), an effect image 097IW43 is displayed in white around the image 097IW42 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when the display timing of the image B2 comes, the image 097IW44 imitating Jupiter is displayed as the image B2 on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-16(E). Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Jupiter is displayed in white in the image 097IW44 as shown in FIG. 12-16(E) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-16(E), an effect image 097IW45 is displayed in white around the image 097IW44 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

Next, when it comes time to display the image B3, the image display device 5 displays an image 097IW46 simulating Saturn as the image B3, as shown in FIG. 12-16(F). Also, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Saturn is displayed in white in the image 097IW46 as shown in FIG. 12-16(F) (see step 097IWS308). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-16(F), the effect image 097IW47 is displayed in white around the image 097IW46 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, no notification sound is output.

As shown in FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21, unlike the chance-up image, do not particularly change in display mode depending on whether it is a losing variation or a big hit variation. , are images displayed in a display mode unrelated to expectations for a big hit.

Also, in FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16, super reach A and super reach B are shown as an example, but when super reach C is executed, it is executed in a similar effect mode. For example, FIGS. 12-9 to 12-16 show the case where an image imitating a bird or an image of a celestial body is displayed as the chance-up image. (for example, an image imitating a vehicle such as a car or an airplane) is displayed, and in the same manner as in FIGS. It may be displayed in a normal mode (white), or an effect image may be displayed in a special mode (blue, green, red) or in a normal mode (white).

Further, for example, when the chance-up effect A6 or the chance-up effect B6 is executed, a common image (for example, a common character image or a common item image) is used as the image X instead of the image A1 or the image B1. The common image X and the effect image that are displayed are displayed in rainbow colors, and the chance-up image and effect image that are displayed after that are also displayed in rainbow colors.

It should be noted that, in this example, as shown in FIGS. In the case of displaying the chance-up images (image B1, image B2, and image B3) during execution of reach B, the chance-up image is displayed by adding the effect image of the common white display color. The mode of the common effect image to be displayed is not limited to such a mode. For example, an image of exactly the same shape and exactly the same display color (for example, an effect image) may be added to display a chance-up image, or an image of a different shape but the same display color may be added. A common image may be added to display the chance-up image. In the case of displaying such a chance-up image in the normal mode, it is not limited to the case of adding a production element such as the completely same image, but it is also possible to add a production element such as a similar image. Any configuration may be used as long as it is configured to display a chance-up image by adding a common effect element.

As described above, according to this characteristic portion 097IW, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (eg, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state). , a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, a character image 097IW11, a character image 097IW21) different from the specific image can be displayed during execution of the suggestive effect. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first suggestive effect (for example, super reach A) and a second suggestive effect (for example, super reach B). , at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4) can be displayed during execution of the first suggestive effect, and the second specific image ( For example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed. In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (e.g., white) and a specific image in a special mode (e.g., blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation of being controlled in a more advantageous state than in the normal mode and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 as shown in FIGS. does not change). Further, when displaying the specific image in the special mode, the specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), and the specific image can be displayed in the normal mode. When displaying the specific image, the specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) different from the first special effect element. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is the preview image, and to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Specifically, when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors), the chance-up image is displayed in a normal mode (for example, white) only by displaying the effect image in the special mode. If the configuration is such that no effect image is displayed when is displayed, the player cannot be made to recognize that the chance-up image is the forewarning image. Therefore, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in the normal mode, the effect image in the normal mode is displayed. , and the player can be made to pay attention to the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode (when the chance-up is not performed), the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a relatively inconspicuous display color (white in this example). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being unnecessarily conspicuous when the chance-up is not performed, and conversely, it is possible to increase the degree of recognition when the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the special mode.

It should be noted that adding the first special effect element and the second special effect element may be, for example, generating and displaying an image obtained by adding an effect image to the chance-up image, or creating and displaying the chance-up image and the effect image. Although the process of synthesizing the image with the chance-up image is not executed, the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed close to each other or superimposed to make it look as if the effect image is added to the chance-up image. good too.

In addition, the first special effect element and the second special effect element are not limited to being effect images, and other images (for example, character images and item images) displayed so as to be added to the chance-up image in some form. ). Further, for example, as the first special effect element and the second special effect element, a lamp or LED near the display area of the chance-up image is displayed, or a predetermined effect sound is output in a manner associated with the chance-up image. , and it is sufficient if it adds a production element in some form.

Also, in this example, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 are shown as specific examples of the "predetermined image", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, during execution of super reach, the background image and the item image may be displayed as predetermined images in a manner that does not change regardless of the degree of expectation.

Also, in this example, as a specific example of the "suggestive effect", the case of executing Super Reach A to C was shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is possible to execute an advance notice effect and a pseudo-continuation as suggestive effects, and during the execution of the advance notice effect and the pseudo-continuation, a chance-up image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode, and an effect image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. It may be configured to Further, for example, a promotion performance suggesting whether or not to be promoted to a variable probability big win during a big win game may be executable as a suggestive performance, and a chance-up image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode during execution of the promotion performance. , and the effect image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. Various modes are conceivable as such suggestive effects.

Further, in this example, regarding "the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state", specifically, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 other than the chance-up image is changed. As shown, "unrelated" means that the expectation for the big win such as the chance-up image is not a factor for the chance-up. Therefore, even when images other than these chance-up images are displayed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win varies depending on the type of super ready-to-win where those images are displayed.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, during the execution of the first suggestion effect, the first specific image is displayed in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow colors) according to the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state. The first specific image is displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors) that is displayable and has a display form corresponding to the form of the first specific image. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the mode of the specific image by the display mode of the added first special effect element.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, it is possible to display an image of a common mode (for example, the image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image. The first specific image and the second specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with rainbow display colors). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, it is possible to execute notification effects (for example, output of notification sound) when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the first special effect element. Further, when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the second special effect element, the notification effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware of it only when the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is high.

Note that this example shows a case where a common notification sound is output regardless of whether the chance-up image or the effect image is displayed in any of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors. It is not limited to such aspects. For example, when the common image X is displayed as the chance-up image and the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in rainbow colors, a dedicated notification sound different from blue, green, and red is output. may be configured. Further, even when the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in blue, green, or red, different notification sounds may be output depending on whether the color is blue, green, or red.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance-up effects A7, B7, C5) for changing a specific image to which the second special effect element is added to a specific image to which the first special effect element is added. is. Therefore, even when the specific image is displayed with the addition of the second special effect element, the sense of anticipation can be maintained.

In addition, according to the present characteristic portion 097IW, the effect of the first period (for example, the effect of the first half of the effect period of Super Reach AC) and whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state after the first period It is possible to execute a suggestive effect including a second period effect (eg, a effect in the latter half of the effect period of Super Reach AC) including an effect (eg, success/failure result notification) to notify. Further, the specific image can be displayed during the first period, and display of the specific image during the second period is restricted (see FIG. 12-8). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be focused on whether or not the control is to be in an advantageous state.

In this example, the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted during the operation valid period in the second half of Super Reach and the period during which the success/fail result notification is displayed. For example, when executing a production that develops from a weak reach with low expectations to a strong reach with high expectations during the execution of super reach, the frequency of displaying chance up images and effect images is high during the period of weak reach, and strong It may be configured such that the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted during the reach period.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state), and the execution of the suggestive effect A specific image (for example, chance up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) can be displayed therein. Also, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects (eg, super reach A to C) including at least a first suggestive effect (eg, super reach A) and a second suggestive effect (eg, super reach B). In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (e.g., white) and a specific image in a special mode (e.g., blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation of being controlled in a more advantageous state than in the normal mode and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, character image 097IW11 and character image 097IW21 as shown in FIGS. does not change). Further, when displaying the specific image in the special mode, the specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image with display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), and the specific image can be displayed in the normal mode. When displaying the specific image, the specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image with a white display color) different from the first special effect element. Then, the specific image can be displayed a different number of times depending on whether the first suggestive effect is executed or the second suggestive effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 and 12-5, super In reach A, the chance up image can be displayed four times (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4), and in super reach B, the chance up image can be displayed three times (image B1, image B2, image B3). be). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is the preview image, and to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 097IW, when the specific image is displayed a plurality of times, when the specific image is displayed the second time after the specific image is displayed the first time, the first time the specific image is displayed at a high rate. 12-4 to 12-6, it is possible to display the specific image in a manner in which the degree of expectation is higher than that controlled in a more advantageous state (for example, chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4 can be executed). Therefore, even if the specific image is displayed in a mode with a low degree of expectation the first time, it is possible to have expectations for the specific image displayed the second time.

In this example, when super reach C, which has the highest degree of expectation for a big win among super reach A to C, is executed, the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is the lowest at two times, and the degree of expectation for a big win is the second highest. The number of times the chance-up image is displayed is 3 when the super reach B is executed, and the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is 4 when the super reach A with the lowest expectation for the big win is executed. ing. In this way, in this example, the chance-up image is displayed more frequently in spite of the high expectation by reducing the number of times the chance-up image is displayed for reach with a higher expectation for the big win. is prevented from becoming cumbersome. Conversely, in the case of the ready-to-win where the expectation for the big win is low, by increasing the number of times the chance-up image is displayed, the player's expectation can be maintained even if the expectation for the ready-to-win is low. .

It should be noted that the configuration shown in the characterizing portion 097IW can be configured by appropriately combining with the configuration shown in the characterizing portion 103SG. For example, the configuration for setting the set value shown in the characteristic portion 103SG and the configuration for executing a specific aspect of the predetermined effect for suggesting the setting are appropriately combined with the configuration for executing the chance-up effect shown in the characteristic portion 097IW. It is possible to configure

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frames 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switches 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball operating handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit 91AK100... Production control microprocessor 91AK131... CPU
91AK132 … VDP
91AK143 ... Video decoder 91AK144 ... Video image renderer 91AK146 ... Text image renderer 91AKM01, 91AKM02, 91AKM11 to 91AKM14 ... Storage area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of displaying a moving image to which a character image is added;
a first storage area for storing data related to moving images;
a second storage area for storing data relating to character images;
moving image control means for controlling display of a moving image using data in the first storage area;
character image control means for controlling the display of character images using the data in the second storage area;
the data in the second storage area includes data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements including a first constituent element and a second constituent element and outline data usable for displaying the character image ;
The character image control means can change the first component and the second component during the display period of the character image added to one moving image ,
The effect executing means executes, as the specific effect, a first specific effect corresponding to the case of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a second specific effect corresponding to the case not being controlled to the advantageous state. is possible and
The moving image control means is capable of controlling display of moving images using different data in the first storage area for the first specific effect and the second specific effect,
a character image data table composed of data relating to a plurality of character image constituent elements in the second storage area;
The character image data table that can be used when executing the first specific effect includes a first character image data table and a second character image data table different from the first character image data table,
The character image data table that can be used when executing the second specific effect includes the first character image data table and the second character image data table,
The degree of expectation that the advantageous state is controlled when the character image is displayed using the second character image data table, rather than when the character image is displayed using the first character image data table. is high,
The first character image data table includes first data for displaying the first character image using a first component made up of first character information and a second component made up of first display setting information; and second data for displaying the second character image using a first component configured by the second character information and a second component configured by the second display setting information,
The second character image data table displays the third character image using the first data, the first element composed of the third character information, and the second element composed of the third display setting information. and a third data to
A specific character image corresponding to a specific first component group can be displayed, and a second component related to the specific character image can be changed at a plurality of timings.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images